WO2021256152A1 - Hair cutting device - Google Patents

Hair cutting device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021256152A1
WO2021256152A1 PCT/JP2021/019134 JP2021019134W WO2021256152A1 WO 2021256152 A1 WO2021256152 A1 WO 2021256152A1 JP 2021019134 W JP2021019134 W JP 2021019134W WO 2021256152 A1 WO2021256152 A1 WO 2021256152A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light
hair
hair cutting
cutting device
optical waveguide
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/019134
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
秀紀 春日井
Original Assignee
パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 filed Critical パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Publication of WO2021256152A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021256152A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A45HAND OR TRAVELLING ARTICLES
    • A45DHAIRDRESSING OR SHAVING EQUIPMENT; EQUIPMENT FOR COSMETICS OR COSMETIC TREATMENTS, e.g. FOR MANICURING OR PEDICURING
    • A45D26/00Hair-singeing apparatus; Apparatus for removing superfluous hair, e.g. tweezers

Definitions

  • FIG. 5A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the same hair cutting member.
  • FIG. 5B is a schematic front view of the same hair cutting member which is partially broken.
  • FIG. 6A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a main part in the same hair cutting device.
  • FIG. 6B is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 6A.
  • FIG. 7A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an operation at the time of cutting hair in the same hair cutting device, particularly a scene before emitting light to the hair.
  • FIG. 7B is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an operation at the time of cutting hair in the same hair cutting device, particularly a scene in which light is emitted to the hair.
  • the "optical waveguide” referred to in the present disclosure means an optical member that guides light along a desired path by passing light.
  • the optical waveguide include an optical fiber having a core and a clad having different refractive indexes from each other and covering the core with a clad.
  • the optical fiber can guide the light along a desired path by passing the light inside the core by utilizing the total reflection of the light at the interface between the core and the clad.
  • the optical waveguide is not limited to a transmission path through which a communication signal (optical signal) is passed, and means an entire optical member that guides light along a desired path.
  • the cover 30 is formed in the shape of an elongated square cylinder having a length along the X axis.
  • the hair cutting device 1 by connecting the ferrule 71 of the hair cutting member 3 and the receptacle portion 81 of the case 20, the hair cutting device 1 has a substantially I shape as a whole when viewed from one side of the Z axis. Consists of the appearance of.
  • the user touches the skin 92 with the surface of the hair cutting member 3 facing the negative direction of the Y axis, and moves the hair cutting member 3 in the positive direction of the Z axis to cut the hair.
  • the hair 91 located in front of the traveling direction of the member 3 (head) (that is, in the positive direction of the Z axis) is cut.
  • the control circuit 6 is a circuit that controls at least the light source 21.
  • the control circuit 6 causes the light source 21 to emit light (lights up) by supplying electric power to the light source 21. Further, the control circuit 6 switches the lighting / extinguishing of the light source 21 and adjusts the output (brightness, wavelength, etc.) of the light source 21.
  • the control circuit 6 includes a printed wiring board (board) and a plurality of electronic components mounted on the printed wiring board. In addition to the light source 21, the control circuit 6 also controls the fan 24, the operation unit 26, and the like. The control circuit 6 will be described in detail in the column of “(2.6) Control circuit”.
  • the operation unit 26 receives the user's operation and outputs an electric signal corresponding to the user's operation to the control circuit 6.
  • the operation unit 26 has at least one mechanical switch such as a push switch or a slide switch.
  • the opening 31 (see FIG. 1) is arranged on the surface of the cover 30 that comes into contact with the user's skin 92 (that is, the surface facing the negative side of the Y axis).
  • the opening 31 is formed in a rectangular shape having a length along the X axis. Through this opening 31, the space inside the cover 30 (accommodation space SP1: see FIG. 5A) and the space outside are connected.
  • a part of the circumferential direction of the core portion 41 is outside the outer peripheral surface 420 of the clad portion 42. It is arranged eccentrically so as to project to.
  • the second region 402 is a region between the first region 401 and the third region 403, and is interposed between the holding member 5 and the ferrule 71.
  • the second region 402 is a curved portion.
  • the second region 402 is fixed by the fixing member F1 in the holder portion H1. That is, in the optical waveguide 4, the first region 401 and the third region 403 are arranged in a "shifted" manner in the Y-axis direction. Therefore, with respect to the optical axis of the core portion 41, the optical axis C1 (see FIG. 2) in the first region 401 and the optical axis in the third region 403 are non-coaxial with each other.
  • the fixed block 32 is arranged along the length (X-axis) of the opening 31 in the cover 30.
  • the holding member 5 is fixed to the surface of the fixing block 32 facing forward (positive direction of the Z axis) in the traveling direction of the hair cutting device 1.
  • the fixing block 32 and the holding member 5 have hairs so as to secure a gap on the front side in the traveling direction of the hair cutting device 1 (hair cutting member 3) in the lateral direction (Z-axis direction) of the opening 31. It is arranged closer to the rear side (that is, the negative side of the Z axis) of the cutting device 1 in the traveling direction.
  • FIG. 1 is a view (front view) of the hair cutting device 1 viewed from the negative side in the Y-axis direction in the positive direction.
  • FIG. 4 is a view (rear view) of the hair cutting member 3 separated from the receptacle portion 81 of the apparatus main body 2 as viewed from the positive side in the Y-axis direction in the negative direction.
  • the hair cutting member 3 includes a light emitting module M1, a ferrule 71, a holder portion H1, a fixing member F1, an adhesive member G1, a cover 30, a fixing cap 34, and a sensor.
  • a unit S1, a detection unit D1, and a detection area D2 are provided.
  • the clad portion 42 covers the periphery of the core portion 41 except for a part from the light receiving surface 40A to the terminal surface 40B.
  • both the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 have relatively high light transmittance.
  • the refractive index of the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are different, and the refractive index of the core portion 41 is larger than that of the clad portion 42.
  • both the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are made of synthetic quartz.
  • the core portion 41 is made of synthetic quartz
  • the clad portion 42 is made of synthetic quartz having an impurity added, which has a different refractive index from that of the core portion 41.
  • the fiber incident NA (Numerical Aperture)
  • the refractive index of the core portion 41 is "1.4698”
  • the refractive index of the clad portion 42 is "1.4309”.
  • the fiber incident NA is "0.2”
  • the refractive index of the core portion 41 is "1.4698”
  • the refractive index of the clad portion 42 is "1.309”.
  • the NA and the refractive index mentioned here are merely examples, and do not mean to define the difference between the refractive index of the core portion 41 and the refractive index of the clad portion 42.
  • the portion covered by the holding member 5 cannot leak light to the hair 91, and therefore does not function as a light emitting unit 40 that emits light to the hair 91.
  • the portion of the core portion 41 that is exposed without being covered by the clad portion 42 and is not covered by the holder portion H1 and the ferrule 71 is the light emitting portion 40.
  • 6A and 6B show cross sections of the optical waveguide 4 including the light emitting unit 40 and the holding member 5 cut in a YY plane.
  • the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the hair 91 to be cut. Therefore, when the hair 91 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40, the light emitting unit 40 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40. Light leaks from the hair 91. Therefore, the hair 91 is cut by the energy of the light leaked from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91.
  • the principle (mechanism) of cutting the hair 91 will be described in detail in the column of "(2.4) Usage example".
  • the refractive index between the light emitting unit 40 and the air is high. Due to the difference, the amount of light leaked from the light emitting unit 40 can be suppressed to a small size.
  • the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 (core portion 41) is "1.4698"
  • the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 is "1.4770”
  • the refractive index of the hair 91 is "1.5432”. Therefore, it can be said that the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 and the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 are about the same.
  • “the same degree of refractive index” means that when there are two different refractive indexes, the smaller refractive index is included in the range of ⁇ 5% of the larger refractive index. It means that both take close values.
  • the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 (1.4698) and the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 are in the range of ⁇ 5% of the refractive index of the hair 91 (1.5432). It can be said that they are at the same level.
  • the refractive index differs depending on the wavelength even if the substance is the same, but the above-mentioned relationship of the refractive index is at least the wavelength of the light output from the light source 21. It is invariant in the range of. That is, at least in the wavelength range of the light output from the light source 21 (for example, in the range of 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less), the refractive index satisfies the relationship with the “light emitting portion ⁇ skin ⁇ hair”.
  • the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is 50 kW / cm 2 or more at least when the hair 91 is cut. That is, in the optical waveguide 4 having the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42, light passes through the inside of the core portion 41, so that the light intensity per unit area (1 cm 2) in the cross section of the core portion 41 is 50 kW. That is all.
  • the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 does not always have to be 50 kW / cm 2 or more, and at least when cutting the hair 91 (at the time of cutting the hair 91), the power density is 50 kW / cm 2 or more. All you need is.
  • the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is 50 kW / cm 2 or more and 300 kW / cm 2 or less. Further, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is preferably 70 kW / cm 2 or more, and more preferably 75 kW / cm 2 or more, which can cut the hair 91. Further, if the hair 91 can be cut quickly (for example, in about 0.1 seconds), the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is more preferably 100 kW / cm 2 or more. ..
  • the optical waveguide 4 is held by the holding member 5 in such a manner that at least the light emitting portion 40 is exposed on the surface of the holding member 5 facing the front (positive direction of the Z axis) in the traveling direction of the hair cutting device 1. There is.
  • the core portion 41 of the optical waveguide 4 held in this way functions as a light emitting portion 40 that cuts the hair 91 by emitting light to the hair 91.
  • the fixing block 32 and the holding member 5 are on the rear side (that is, the negative side of the Z axis) of the hair cutting device 1 in the lateral direction (Z-axis direction) of the opening 31. (See FIG. 5A). Therefore, a gap is secured between the holding member 5 and the peripheral edge of the opening 31 on the front side (that is, the positive side of the Z axis) of the hair cutting device 1 in the traveling direction, and the opening is opened through this gap. It is possible to take in the hair 91 to be cut into the portion 31.
  • the base 51 is formed in a prismatic shape having a length along the X axis.
  • the base 51 is bonded, welded, pasted, or bonded using a fastening member (screw, etc.) to the surface of the fixed block 32 facing the front (positive direction of the Z axis) of the hair cutting device 1 in the traveling direction. It is fixed by appropriate means.
  • the refractive index of the base 51 is equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41 (light emitting portion 40).
  • the base 51 has four surfaces, a facing surface 511, a side surface 512, a back surface 513, and a back surface 514.
  • the cross section orthogonal to the length (X-axis) of the base 51 has a substantially rectangular shape with these four surfaces as four sides.
  • the facing surface 511 is a surface facing the surface 921 of the skin 92 when the hair 91 is cut.
  • the side surface 512 is a surface that intersects the surface 921 of the skin 92 when the hair 91 is cut, and is a surface adjacent to the facing surface 511.
  • the back surface 513 is a surface facing the opposite side to the facing surface 511 and is a surface adjacent to the side surface 512.
  • the back surface 514 is a surface facing the side opposite to the side surface 512, and is a surface adjacent to the back surface 513.
  • the optical waveguide 4 is held on the side surface 512.
  • the clad portion 42 can appropriately limit the amount of light leakage, and the light leaks from the core portion 41 more than necessary. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the power density of light.
  • the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 may be equal to or lower than the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40.
  • a positioning portion 53 (groove) for positioning the optical waveguide 4 is formed on the side surface 512 where the optical waveguide 4 is held.
  • the positioning portion 53 is formed over the entire length of the base 51 in the longitudinal direction (X-axis direction).
  • the optical waveguide 4 is held on the side surface 512 of the base 51 so that the clad portion 42 is accommodated in the groove as the positioning portion 53.
  • the through hole 811 includes a circular small diameter hole 812 and a circular large diameter hole 813 having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the small diameter hole 812.
  • the inner diameter of the small diameter hole 812 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the ferrule 71 so that the ferrule 71 fits in the small diameter hole 812 with almost no gap.
  • the inner diameter of the large-diameter hole 813 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the holder portion H1 so that the holder portion H1 fits within the large-diameter hole 813.
  • the inner diameter of the small diameter hole 812 is smaller than the outer diameter of the fourth lens 224 arranged adjacent to the small diameter hole 812.
  • the holder part H1 is a part where a part of the light emitting module M1 and a part of the ferrule 71 are inserted and integrally bonded to each other.
  • a plurality of second connection lines 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 9) electrically connected to the control circuit 6 are embedded in the receptacle section 81.
  • the conductor portion 102A (see FIG. 9, for example, the pin receiving portion) at the tip of each second connecting line 102 is exposed from one end (peripheral portion 815) on the positive side of the X-axis of the receptacle portion 81.
  • the conductor portion 101A of each first connecting line 101 exposed from the holder portion H1 becomes the conductor of the corresponding second connecting line 102. It is connected to the unit 102A.
  • the detection unit D1 is arranged on the negative side of the X-axis with respect to the reflection surface Y10. Specifically, the detection unit D1 is arranged between the reflection surface Y10 and the end surface 40B in the direction of the X axis.
  • the detection unit D1 is arranged on the negative side of the Z axis with respect to the optical waveguide 4.
  • the location of the detection unit D1 is not particularly limited as long as it can receive the target light OB1 and is arranged so as not to block the light derived from the end surface 40B and incident on the reflection surface Y10. .
  • the detection unit D1 is schematically formed in a rectangular shape, but the shape is not particularly limited.
  • the light receiving element of the detection unit D1 is electrically connected to the wire for the detection unit D1 among the plurality of first connection lines 101.
  • the light receiving element of the detection unit D1 is electrically connected to the control circuit 6 via the connection line (101, 102).
  • the detection unit D1 outputs an electric signal (detection signal) corresponding to the light intensity incident from the light receiving surface D10 to the control circuit 6 via the connection line (101, 102).
  • the hair cutting device 1 having the above-described configuration is used for cutting (here, “shaving”) the hair 91 (here, “whisker”).
  • the user holds the device body 2 (grip) of the hair cutting device 1 with one hand and holds the hair cutting device 1, and the hair cutting member 3 (head), that is, the negative direction of the Y axis of the cover 30.
  • the surface facing the user is brought into contact with the user's skin 92.
  • the hair 91 to be cut is introduced into the cover 30 from the opening 31 at a position facing the light emitting portion 40 held by the holding member 5.
  • second emitted light Op2 light (second emitted light Op2) is emitted from the light emitting portion 40 to the skin 92.
  • the second emitted light Op2 is directly emitted from the light emitting portion 40 to the skin 92, and the second emitted light Op2 is mainly emitted to the raised portion 922.
  • the portion of the optical waveguide 4 that comes into direct contact with the raised portion 922 is likely to be the clad portion 42, and the energy of the second emitted light Op2 is lower than that of the first emitted light Op1. ..
  • the user performs the work of removing the old hair cutting member 3 that is being attached to the device main body 2 from the device main body 2. Specifically, the user rotates the fixing cap 34 of the hair cutting member 3 in the direction of loosening with a finger. As a result, the fixing cap 34 moves in the positive direction of the X-axis while the thread groove 341 fastened to the threaded portion 810 of the receptacle portion 81 is loosened, and finally comes out of the receptacle portion 81. In this state, the user holds the outside of the cover 30 by hand and pulls it in the positive direction of the X-axis to emit light that is integrally coupled to the ferrule 71 via the ferrule 71 and the holder portion H1.
  • Module M1 can be pulled out in the positive direction of the X-axis. At that time, the convex portion H11 fitted in the groove portion 814 also moves in the positive direction of the X axis along the groove portion 814, and finally exits from the groove portion 814 (see FIG. 3).
  • the ferrule 71 is fitted into the small diameter hole 812 in the receptacle portion 81, and the holder portion H1 is fitted into the large diameter hole 813 in the receptacle portion 81.
  • the light receiving surface 40A faces the optical system 22 (fourth lens 224) in close proximity to each other, and the optical axis C1 of the core portion 41 meets the optical axis CX1 of the optical system 22 (even if the user is not aware of it). It will match (automatically). In short, the positioning of the light emitting module M1 is facilitated, and the assembling property is improved.
  • the control circuit 6 has an input unit 61, a mode switching unit 62, an output adjusting unit 63, a driving unit 64, and a determination unit 65.
  • the control circuit 6 includes, for example, a microcontroller having one or more processors and one or more memories.
  • the microcontroller realizes the function as the control circuit 6 by executing the program recorded in one or more memories by one or more processors.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in memory, may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, or may be provided through a telecommunication line.
  • the above program is a program for making one or more processors function as the control circuit 6.
  • the light source 21 since the light source 21 emits light during the light emission period T1 of the drive current I1 and the light source 21 turns off during the extinguishing period T2 of the drive current I1, the light source 21 intermittently generates light (blinks) according to the frequency of the drive current I1. )do. In short, the light source 21 intermittently generates light by repeating the light emission period T1 and the extinguishing period T2.
  • the duty of the drive current I1 (the ratio of the light emitting period T1 to one cycle) is 50%. That is, the time length of the light emitting period T1 and the time length of the extinguishing period T2 are equal to each other.
  • the light source 21 has two types of operation modes, a first mode and a second mode.
  • the first mode is a mode in which the action on the skin 92 is prioritized, and the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1 / 10,000 second or less. That is, if the operation mode of the light source 21 is the first mode, the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1 / 10,000 second or less.
  • the drive unit 64 drives the light source 21 with a drive current I1 having a frequency of 5 kHz or more.
  • the maximum time for the light source 21 to continuously generate light is 1/10000 second (1 / 10,000s) or less.
  • the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1/15000 second.
  • the second mode is a mode in which the cutting of the hair 91 is prioritized, and the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1/100 second or more. That is, when the operation mode of the light source 21 is the second mode, the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1/100 second or more.
  • the drive unit 64 drives the light source 21 with a drive current I1 having a frequency of 50 Hz or less. As a result, the minimum time for the light source 21 to continuously generate light is 1/100 second (1 / 100s) or more.
  • the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1/80 second.
  • the control circuit 6 has a mode switching unit 62 for switching between the first mode and the second mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the light source 21 is the first mode in which the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1 / 10,000 second or less, and the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1/100 second or more. It is possible to switch between a certain second mode.
  • the output adjusting unit 63 adjusts the output of the light source 21 by controlling the driving unit 64.
  • the output of the light source 21 to be adjusted by the output adjusting unit 63 includes the light intensity (brightness) generated by the light source 21, the wavelength of light, and the like.
  • the output adjusting unit 63 adjusts the output of the light source 21 according to, for example, an electric signal from the input unit 61.
  • the output adjusting unit 63 may adjust the output of the light source 21 under the control of the determination unit 65, which will be described later.
  • the determination unit 65 of the control circuit 6 determines the contact state of the skin 92 with the contact surfaces (module side contact surface 501 and cover side contact surface 301) (execution of the determination process). Specifically, the determination unit 65 determines (estimates) that the skin 92 has switched from the non-contact state to the contact state and that the skin 92 has switched from the contact state to the non-contact state.
  • the determination unit 65 determines the contact state based on the electric signal received from the sensor unit S1 (first sensor unit S11, second sensor unit S12). Then, the determination unit 65 controls the drive unit 64 (or the output adjustment unit 63) based on the determination result to start driving the light source 21 to execute the optical output or stop the drive of the light source 21 (the drive of the light source 21 is stopped). The light output may decrease).
  • the determination unit 65 determines that the skin 92 has switched from the contact state to the non-contact state based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1, the determination unit 65 limits the light output from the light emission module M1. That is, the determination unit 65 causes the drive unit 64 to stop driving the light source 21 (the light output may be reduced). The determination unit 65 changes the skin 92 from the non-contact state to the contact state when both the voltage level of the first sensor unit S11 and the voltage level of the second sensor unit S12 (either of them may be) becomes less than the threshold value. It is determined that the switch has been made.
  • the hair cutting device 1 of the present embodiment detects the target light OB1 in the detection area D2 by using the detection unit D1 (detection step). Specifically, the determination unit 65 performs diagnostic processing regarding the optical output of the hair cutting device 1 based on the detection signal received from the detection unit D1. That is, the determination unit 65 determines whether or not the state regarding the light output of the hair cutting device 1 is in the specific state based on the detection result regarding the target light OB1 by the detection unit D1.
  • the hair cutting device 1 when the hair cutting device 1 is in a specific state (here, an abnormality, aged deterioration, or dirt is generated in any one of the light source 21, the optical system 22, the optical waveguide 4, etc.), it is in a normal state.
  • the light intensity received by the detection unit D1 is lower than that of the detection unit D1.
  • the determination unit 65 receives a detection signal from the detection unit D1 in which the current flowing through the photodiode is converted into a voltage. That is, the determination unit 65 monitors, for example, a change in voltage through the received detection signal. In other words, the determination unit 65 acquires information on the light intensity from the detection unit D1.
  • the current-voltage conversion may be performed by the control circuit 6.
  • the signal level (for example, voltage) of the detection signal received from the detection unit D1 is less than the reference value Rf1 (see FIG. 10B).
  • the voltage value V2 is a voltage value in a normal state.
  • the voltage value V1 is a voltage value in a specific state.
  • the reference value Rf1 is set between, for example, the voltage value V1 and the voltage value V2.
  • the mode of change in the signal level (voltage) of the detection signal with the passage of time may differ depending on the type of specific state.
  • the type of the specific state is an "abnormality” such as a failure or breakage
  • the "mode of change” is likely to show a sharp decrease as shown in FIG. 10B.
  • the type of the specific state is "dirt” such as the optical waveguide 4
  • the "mode of change” is gradual as compared with "abnormality", but is constant over a period of several weeks or months, for example. Is likely to show a decrease in.
  • the optical waveguide 4 or the like shows a more gradual decrease than "dirt" from the start of use to the life of the optical waveguide 4. That is, the rate of decrease with the passage of time may increase in the order of "aging deterioration", "dirt", and "abnormality".
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an operation example related to the diagnostic process of the hair cutting device 1.
  • FIG. 12 a flowchart showing an operation example related to the diagnostic process of the hair cutting device 1.
  • an "abnormality" occurs while the user is using the hair cutting device 1 will be described.
  • the hair cutting device 1 first accepts an operation of turning on the main power through the operation unit 26 (ST11).
  • the hair cutting device 1 enters the standby state, executes a determination process, and monitors the detection signal from the sensor unit S1 (ST12).
  • the target light OB1 is a part of the light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and heading toward the detection region D2, the target light is compared with the case where the light heading toward the detection region D2 is directly detected, for example. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the saturation of the brightness of the OB1. That is, for the detection unit D1, the light intensity derived from the end surface 40B of the optical waveguide 4 may be too strong, and the control circuit 6 may be in a specific state depending on the type of a specific state such as dirt or deterioration over time. The accompanying change in light intensity may be overlooked. At this point, since the target light OB1 is a part of the light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and heading toward the detection region D2, the luminance saturation can be suppressed.
  • the hair cutting device 1 (particularly the control circuit 6) in the present disclosure includes a computer system.
  • the computer system mainly consists of a processor and a memory as hardware.
  • the function as the control circuit 6 in the present disclosure is realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system.
  • the program may be pre-recorded in the memory of the computer system, may be provided through a telecommunications line, and may be recorded on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, optical disk, hard disk drive, etc. that can be read by the computer system. May be provided.
  • the processor of a computer system is composed of one or more electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit (IC) or a large scale integrated circuit (LSI).
  • IC semiconductor integrated circuit
  • LSI large scale integrated circuit
  • the integrated circuit such as IC or LSI referred to here has a different name depending on the degree of integration, and includes an integrated circuit called a system LSI, VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration), or ULSI (Ultra Large Scale Integration).
  • an FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array
  • a logic device capable of reconfiguring the junction relationship inside the LSI or reconfiguring the circuit partition inside the LSI should also be adopted as a processor.
  • a plurality of electronic circuits may be integrated on one chip, or may be distributed on a plurality of chips.
  • a plurality of chips may be integrated in one device, or may be distributed in a plurality of devices.
  • the computer system referred to here includes a microcontroller having one or more processors and one or more memories. Therefore, the microprocessor is also composed of one or a plurality of electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit or a large-scale integrated circuit.
  • a member having a translucency having a refractive index larger than that of the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 is optical-guided in the detection region D2.
  • Leakage light may be generated by arranging the waveguide 4 so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the waveguide 4.
  • the diffusion unit Y2 is composed of a member having a diffusion surface Y20 that emits light (incident light) in various directions.
  • the diffusion unit Y2 is arranged in the detection area D2.
  • the diffusion portion Y2 is composed of plate-shaped members arranged so that the thickness direction thereof is parallel to the X axis, but the shape of the diffusion portion Y2 is not particularly limited.
  • the diffusion surface Y20 can be formed by, for example, providing a fine uneven structure on the surface of the base material of the diffusion portion Y2.
  • the method of forming the diffusion surface Y20 is not particularly limited.
  • the diffuser Y2 may be made of frosted glass, for example.
  • the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2 are provided, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used, for example. Therefore, it is possible to provide the hair cutting device 1C having improved reliability regarding light output. In particular, since the hair cutting device 1C uses the diffused and transmitted light, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1 with a relatively simple configuration.
  • the hair cutting device 1D differs from the hair cutting device 1 in that it includes a reflecting portion Y3 that reflects specularly.
  • the detection unit D1 is arranged so that the light receiving surface D10 is displaced from the direction of the optical axis C2 of the reflected light reflected by the reflecting surface Y30.
  • the light receiving surface D10 does not intersect the direction of the optical axis C2 of the reflected light.
  • the reflected light reflected by the reflecting surface Y30 is used, the reflected light having a high light intensity along the optical axis C2 is less likely to be included in the target light OB1, and the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1. The possibility of doing so can be further reduced.
  • the reflecting portion Y3 may be composed of a half mirror.
  • the detection unit D1 may be arranged on the back side of the reflection unit Y3 when viewed from the optical waveguide 4, similarly to the diffusion unit Y2 described above.
  • the hair cutting device 1E is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that it includes a conversion unit Y4.
  • the hair cutting device 1E includes a detection unit D1 and a detection area D2, similarly to the hair cutting device 1.
  • the hair cutting device 1E is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that the conversion unit Y4 is provided instead of the diffusion unit Y1 of the hair cutting device 1.
  • the conversion unit Y4 is arranged in the detection area D2.
  • the conversion unit Y4 includes phosphor particles Y40 that generate light by inducing excitation by light (excitation light) transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and entering the detection region D2.
  • the target light OB1 includes the light generated by the conversion unit Y4.
  • the conversion unit Y4 is composed of, for example, a plate-shaped wavelength conversion member including a plurality of phosphor particles Y40 and a translucent sealing layer for sealing the plurality of phosphor particles Y40. It is composed.
  • the conversion unit Y4 has an incident surface Y41 and an exit surface Y42 on both end surfaces in the thickness direction thereof.
  • the incident surface Y41 faces the end surface 40B of the optical waveguide 4.
  • the direction of the optical axis C1 of the optical waveguide 4 is orthogonal to each of the incident surface Y41 and the exit surface Y42.
  • the phosphor particles Y40 When the direct light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and derived from the end surface 40B is incident on the incident surface Y41 of the conversion unit Y4, the phosphor particles Y40 absorb the excitation light and differ from the wavelength of the excitation light. Generates light of wavelength (eg, long wavelength). Then, the light is emitted from the emission surface Y42 of the conversion unit Y4. Further, among the incident light, the light that is not absorbed by the phosphor particles Y40 is emitted as it is from the emission surface Y42 of the conversion unit Y4 without being wavelength-converted.
  • wavelength eg, long wavelength
  • the detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2 at a position where the target light OB1 can be received. That is, the detection unit D1 is arranged so as to receive the light emitted from the emission surface Y42 of the conversion unit Y4.
  • the detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2 so that, for example, the light receiving surface D10 faces the exit surface Y42.
  • the light receiving surface D10 is orthogonal to the direction of the optical axis C1 of the optical waveguide 4.
  • the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2 are provided, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used, for example. Therefore, it is possible to provide the hair cutting device 1E having improved reliability regarding light output.
  • the hair cutting device 1E uses the light generated by the conversion unit Y4, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1 with a relatively simple configuration.
  • the detection unit D1 of the hair cutting device 1 described above receives the target light OB1 of the secondary light (diffused light), but for example, the primary light, that is, the light traveling in the optical waveguide 4 and being derived directly. It may receive light. However, by using the secondary light, as described above, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1. In addition, the life of the detection unit D1 can be extended.
  • the hair cutting device 1 accepts switching of the main power supply on / off through the operation unit 26.
  • the hair cutting device 1 may be configured to accept the start of driving the light source 21, that is, the start of the light output from the light source 21, through the operation unit 26.
  • the function of automatically starting the driving of the light source 21 based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1 in the control circuit 6 or automatically limiting the light output to the optical output may be omitted.
  • the hair cutting device 1 may be configured to automatically switch the main power on / off based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1.
  • the sensor unit S1 may include a switch for opening and closing the contacts.
  • the hair cutting device 1 closes the contact point of the sensor unit S1 by the pressure received from the skin 92, so that the main power supply is switched on and the driving of the light source 21 is automatically started. In this case, the user can save the trouble of operating the operation unit 26, and the usability is further improved.
  • the sensor unit S1 may be configured as an energization type sensor.
  • the pair of electrodes of the sensor unit S1 (the electrode S2 of the first sensor unit S11 and the electrode S2 of the second sensor unit S12) may form an anode and a cathode, respectively.
  • the control circuit 6 determines the contact state of the skin 92 by applying a voltage between these electrodes and detecting the current flowing between the electrodes through the human body when the skin 92 comes into contact with these electrodes. May be good.
  • the sensor unit S1 may be a proximity sensor for detecting the proximity state of the skin 92 instead of the contact state of the skin 92.
  • the sensor unit S1 may configure a distance sensor that detects the distance to the skin 92.
  • the device main body 2 (case 20) accommodating the light source 21 and the like is assumed to correspond to a grip, but a grip portion is provided separately from the case 20, and the case 20 and the grip portion are connected to each other. May be done. Then, the contents in the case 20 may be housed in the case 20 and the grip portion in a distributed manner.
  • the optical waveguide 4 is not limited to an optical fiber in which the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are made of synthetic quartz, and may be, for example, an optical fiber made of quartz (SiO 2 ) or plastic.
  • an optical fiber made of plastic there is an optical fiber in which the clad portion 42 is made of a fluorine-based polymer or the like and the core portion 41 is made of a completely fluorinated polymer, polymethyl methacrylate-based or polycarbonate or the like.
  • the optical waveguide 4 may be a slab waveguide, a rectangular optical waveguide, a photonic crystal fiber, or the like.
  • the optical waveguide 4 may have a core portion 41 as a minimum configuration, and the clad portion 42 may be omitted as appropriate.
  • the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 in the holding member 5 is smaller than the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 (core portion 41). That is, the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41.
  • the refractive index of the fixing member F1 in the holder portion H1 is smaller than the refractive index of the core portion 41 is not an essential configuration for the hair cutting member 3 and the hair cutting device 1. That is, the refractive index of the fixing member F1 may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41.
  • the fact that the refractive index of the adhesive member G1 in the ferrule 71 is smaller than the refractive index of the core portion 41 is not an essential configuration for the hair cutting member 3 and the hair cutting device 1. That is, the refractive index of the adhesive member G1 may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41.
  • the light source 21 is not limited to light having a single wavelength, and may generate light having a plurality of wavelengths, for example. In this case, the light source 21 may generate light having a plurality of wavelengths at the same time, or may generate light while sequentially switching.
  • the light emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91 can target a plurality of chromophores corresponding to a plurality of wavelengths, so that the bonds of a plurality of types of molecules are broken. It is possible to improve the cutting efficiency of the hair 91.
  • the hair cutting member 3 may be provided with a plurality of optical waveguides 4.
  • the hair cutting member 3 can cut the hair 91 by emitting light to the hair 91 at each light emitting unit 40 of the plurality of optical waveguides 4.
  • the plurality of optical waveguides 4 may pass light having the same wavelength or may pass light having a plurality of wavelengths different from each other.
  • a plurality of optical waveguides 4 may be arranged so as to be closer to the center.
  • a plurality of ferrules 71 may be provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the optical waveguide 4.
  • the switching between the first mode and the second mode is manually performed, but the switching is not limited to this example, and the switching between the first mode and the second mode is automatically performed. May be good.
  • the determination unit 65 may automatically switch between the first mode and the second mode according to the contact state of the skin 92.
  • the battery 23 is not limited to the secondary battery, but may be a primary battery. Further, the hair cutting device 1 is not limited to the battery-powered type, and may operate by receiving power supply from an external power source such as a system power source (commercial power source), for example. In this case, the battery 23 as the hair cutting device 1 can be omitted.
  • a mirror is arranged on the end surface 40B on the opposite side of the light receiving surface 40A in the optical waveguide 4, and the light reaching the tip of the optical waveguide 4 is reflected in the optical waveguide 4 by the mirror. May be good.
  • the target light (OB1) is transmitted in the optical waveguide (4) to the detection region (D2). It is a part of the light that goes. According to the third aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1), as compared with the case where the light directed to the detection region (D2) is directly detected, for example.
  • the target light (OB1) includes the leaked light leaked from the optical waveguide (4) without total internal reflection. According to the fourth aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
  • the hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the fifth aspect further includes a diffusion unit (Y1, Y2) in the third or fourth aspect.
  • the diffusing portions (Y1 and Y2) are arranged in the detection region (D2), and diffusely reflect or diffusely transmit the light transmitted through the optical waveguide (4) and entering the detection region (D2).
  • the target light (OB1) includes diffused light diffused by the diffusing portions (Y1, Y2). According to the fifth aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
  • the hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the sixth aspect further includes a conversion unit (Y4) in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
  • the conversion unit (Y4) is preferably provided in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
  • the conversion unit (Y4) is arranged in the detection region (D2), and the fluorescence transmitted through the optical waveguide (4) and enters the detection region (D2) causes excitation to generate light. Includes body particles (Y40).
  • the target light (OB1) includes the light generated by the conversion unit (Y4). According to the sixth aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
  • the hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the seventh aspect is arranged in the detection region (D2) in any one of the first to sixth aspects and transmits in the optical waveguide (4). Further, a reflecting unit (Y3) that reflects the light that has entered the detection region (D2) is further provided. The reflective portion (Y3) is preferably provided in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
  • the target light (OB1) includes the reflected light reflected by the reflecting unit (Y3). According to the seventh aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
  • the hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the eighth aspect further includes a determination unit (65) in any one of the first to seventh aspects.
  • the determination unit (65) determines whether or not the state regarding the light output of the hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) is in a specific state based on the detection result regarding the target light (OB1) by the detection unit (D1). ..
  • the eighth aspect since the determination of the specific state can be performed by using the detection result of the detection unit (D1), the reliability regarding the optical output is further improved.
  • the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) is a light emitting module (in the ninth aspect, when it is specified in the determination unit that at least the type of the specific state is a predetermined type.
  • a limiting unit (66) that limits the light output from M1) is further provided. According to the tenth aspect, the light output can be limited according to a predetermined type, and the reliability of the light output is further improved.
  • the hair cutting method includes a light emission step and a detection step.
  • the hair (91) is emitted from the light emission module (M1) having the optical waveguide (4) including the core portion (41) to the hair (91) protruding from the skin (92). Cut off.
  • the detection step the detection region (D2) through which the target light (OB1) caused by the light transmitted through the optical waveguide (4), which is arranged in the cover (30) configured to cover the light emission module (M1), passes through.
  • the hair cutting method includes the detection step of detecting the target light (OB1) in the detection region (D2), so that the detection result of the detection unit (D1) can be used. Therefore, it is possible to provide a hair cutting method with improved reliability regarding light output.
  • the configurations according to the second to tenth aspects are not essential configurations for the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) and can be omitted as appropriate.
  • the hair cutting device can be applied to cutting various hairs of humans or non-human animals in various fields such as home use, beauty, medical care, and long-term care.
  • 1,1A-1E Hair cutting device 30 Cover 4 Optical wave guide 41 Core part 65 Judgment part 66 Limit part 91 Hair 92 Skin A2 Transmission direction D1 Detection part D2 Detection area M1 Light emission module OB1 Target light Y1, Y2 Diffuse part Y3 Reflection part Y4 converter Y40 phosphor particles

Abstract

The purpose of the present disclosure is to provide a hair cutting device with improved reliability pertaining to light output. A hair cutting device (1) of one aspect of the present disclosure comprises a light-emitting module (M1), a cover (30), a detection region (D2), and a detection unit (D1). The light-emitting module (M1) has a light waveguide (4) including a core section and cuts hair by emitting light onto hair protruding from the skin. The cover (30) is configured so as to cover the light-emitting module (M1). The detection region (D2) is arranged inside the cover (30), and target light (OB1) originating from light propagating within the light waveguide (4) passes through the detection region (D2). The detection unit (D1) detects the target light (OB1) within the detection region (D2).

Description

毛切断装置Hair cutting device
 本開示は、一般に、毛切断装置に関し、より詳細には、毛に光を作用させることで毛を切断する毛切断装置に関する。 The present disclosure generally relates to a hair cutting device, and more particularly to a hair cutting device that cuts hair by allowing light to act on the hair.
 特許文献1には、レーザ光を利用して毛を切断するように構成された装置が記載されている。特許文献1に記載の装置は、レーザ光源と、ファイバ光学系と、を含んでいる。レーザ光源は、毛を効果的に切断するために所定の発色団を標的とするように選択された波長を有するレーザ光を、発生させるように構成されている。ファイバ光学系は、近位端と遠位端と外壁と、遠位端に向かって配置されて側壁の一部に沿って延在する切断領域と、を有する。ファイバ光学系は、近位端においてレーザ光源からレーザ光を受け取り、そのレーザ光を近位端から遠位端に向かって導光し、切断領域が毛に接触すると毛に向かって切断領域から光を放出する。 Patent Document 1 describes a device configured to cut hair using a laser beam. The apparatus described in Patent Document 1 includes a laser light source and a fiber optical system. The laser light source is configured to generate a laser beam having a wavelength selected to target a predetermined chromophore in order to effectively cut the hair. Fiber optics have proximal and distal ends, an outer wall, and a cut region located towards the distal end that extends along a portion of the sidewall. The fiber optics receive laser light from a laser light source at the proximal end, guide the laser light from the proximal end to the distal end, and when the cut region comes into contact with the hair, light from the cut region towards the hair. Is released.
特表2016-514491号公報Special Table 2016-514491
 特許文献1に記載の構成においては、例えばレーザ光源又はファイバ光学系等に起こり得る経年劣化、異常又は汚れ等によって光出力が低下してしまう可能性がある。したがって、光を利用した毛切断装置の実用化にあたり、光出力に関する信頼性の向上が求められる。 In the configuration described in Patent Document 1, for example, the light output may decrease due to aged deterioration, abnormality, dirt, etc. that may occur in a laser light source, a fiber optical system, or the like. Therefore, in order to put the hair cutting device using light into practical use, it is required to improve the reliability of the light output.
 本開示は上記事由に鑑みてなされ、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置を提供することを目的とする。 The present disclosure has been made in view of the above reasons, and an object of the present disclosure is to provide a hair cutting device having improved reliability regarding light output.
 本開示の一態様の毛切断装置は、光放出モジュールと、カバーと、検知領域と、検知部と、を備える。前記光放出モジュールは、コア部を含む光導波路を有し、皮膚から突出する毛に光を放出することで前記毛の切断を行う。前記カバーは、前記光放出モジュールを覆うように構成される。前記検知領域は、前記カバー内に配置されて、前記光導波路内を伝達する光に起因した対象光が通る。前記検知部は、前記検知領域内の前記対象光を検知する。 The hair cutting device of one aspect of the present disclosure includes a light emitting module, a cover, a detection area, and a detection unit. The light emitting module has an optical waveguide including a core portion, and cuts the hair by emitting light to the hair protruding from the skin. The cover is configured to cover the light emitting module. The detection region is arranged in the cover, and the target light caused by the light transmitted in the optical waveguide passes through. The detection unit detects the target light in the detection area.
 本開示によれば、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置を提供できる、という利点がある。 According to the present disclosure, there is an advantage that a hair cutting device having improved reliability regarding light output can be provided.
図1は、一実施形態に係る毛切断装置の、一部破断した正面図である。FIG. 1 is a partially broken front view of the hair cutting device according to the embodiment. 図2は、同上の毛切断装置の断面図であり、毛切断部材が装置本体に取り付けられた状態の図である。FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view of the hair cutting device of the same as above, and is a view of a state in which the hair cutting member is attached to the main body of the device. 図3は、同上の毛切断装置の断面図であり、同上の毛切断部材が同上の装置本体に対して分離した状態の図である。FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the hair cutting device of the same as above, and is a view of a state in which the hair cutting member of the same as above is separated from the main body of the device of the same. 図4は、同上の毛切断装置の要部の背面図であり、特に同上の毛切断部材及び同上の装置本体におけるレセプタクル部を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a rear view of a main part of the hair cutting device of the same as above, and in particular, is a view showing a receptacle part of the hair cutting member of the same as above and the main body of the device of the same as above. 図5Aは、同上の毛切断部材の模式的な断面図である。FIG. 5A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the same hair cutting member. 図5Bは、一部破断した同上の毛切断部材の模式的な正面図である。FIG. 5B is a schematic front view of the same hair cutting member which is partially broken. 図6Aは、同上の毛切断装置における要部の構成を示す概略断面図である。FIG. 6A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration of a main part in the same hair cutting device. 図6Bは、図6Aの要部の拡大図である。FIG. 6B is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 6A. 図7Aは、同上の毛切断装置における毛の切断時の動作、特に毛に光を放出する前のシーンを示す概略断面図である。FIG. 7A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an operation at the time of cutting hair in the same hair cutting device, particularly a scene before emitting light to the hair. 図7Bは、同上の毛切断装置における毛の切断時の動作、特に毛に光を放出するシーンを示す概略断面図である。FIG. 7B is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an operation at the time of cutting hair in the same hair cutting device, particularly a scene in which light is emitted to the hair. 図7Cは、同上の毛切断装置における毛の切断時の動作、特に毛の切断後のシーンを示す概略断面図である。FIG. 7C is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the operation of the hair cutting device at the time of cutting the hair, particularly the scene after the hair is cut. 図8Aは、同上の毛切断装置における毛の切断時の動作、特に毛に光を放出する前のシーンを示す概略断面図である。FIG. 8A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an operation at the time of cutting hair in the same hair cutting device, particularly a scene before emitting light to the hair. 図8Bは、同上の毛切断装置における毛の切断時の動作、特に毛に光を放出するシーンを示す概略断面図である。FIG. 8B is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an operation at the time of cutting hair in the same hair cutting device, particularly a scene in which light is emitted to the hair. 図9は、同上の毛切断装置の制御回路の概略構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the control circuit of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図10Aは、同上の毛切断装置における皮膚の接触状態、及び非接触状態に対する光出力に関するグラフである。FIG. 10A is a graph relating to the light output with respect to the contact state and the non-contact state of the skin in the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図10Bは、同上の毛切断装置の正常時及び異常時における検知部の電圧変化に関するグラフである。FIG. 10B is a graph relating to the voltage change of the detection unit at the normal time and the abnormal time of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図11は、同上の毛切断装置の動作例1を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation example 1 of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図12は、同上の毛切断装置の動作例2を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an operation example 2 of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図13は、同上の毛切断装置の第1変形例の模式的な外観図である。FIG. 13 is a schematic external view of the first modification of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図14Aは、同上の毛切断装置の第2変形例の模式的な断面図である。FIG. 14A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second modification of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図14Bは、同上の毛切断装置の第2変形例の模式的な断面図である。FIG. 14B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second modification of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図14Cは、同上の毛切断装置の第2変形例の模式的な断面図である。FIG. 14C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second modification of the hair cutting device of the same as above. 図14Dは、同上の毛切断装置の第2変形例の模式的な断面図である。FIG. 14D is a schematic cross-sectional view of the second modification of the hair cutting device of the same as above.
 (1)概要
 以下、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1の概要について、図1~図5Bを参照して説明する。毛切断装置1は、毛91(図6A参照)に光を作用させることで毛91を切断する装置である。毛切断装置1での切断対象となる毛91は、一例として人の「ひげ」等であるが、特に限定されず、人等の皮膚92から突出する様々な毛(例えば腕又は脚の体毛等)を含む。図6Aでは、毛91及び皮膚92を想像線(二点鎖線)で示す。
(1) Overview Hereinafter, an outline of the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 5B. The hair cutting device 1 is a device that cuts the hair 91 by applying light to the hair 91 (see FIG. 6A). The hair 91 to be cut by the hair cutting device 1 is, for example, a human “beard” or the like, but is not particularly limited, and various hairs protruding from the human skin 92 (for example, body hair of an arm or leg, etc.) )including. In FIG. 6A, the hair 91 and the skin 92 are shown by an imaginary line (dashed-dotted line).
 要するに、毛切断装置1は、物理的な「刃」にて毛91を切断する一般的な「かみそり」又は「はさみ」等とは異なり、「刃」の代わりに光エネルギを毛91に与えることで、毛91の切断を行う。そのため、毛切断装置1では、一般的な、「かみそり」又は「はさみ」等に比較して、毛91の周囲の皮膚92等にダメージを与えにくく、さらに、刃こぼれ等の物理的な劣化も生じにくい。 In short, the hair cutting device 1 gives light energy to the hair 91 instead of the "blade", unlike a general "razor" or "scissors" that cuts the hair 91 with a physical "blade". Then, the hair 91 is cut. Therefore, the hair cutting device 1 is less likely to damage the skin 92 or the like around the hair 91 as compared with a general "razor" or "scissors", and further, physical deterioration such as blade spillage is also caused. It is unlikely to occur.
 本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1は、図1~図3に示すように、毛切断部材3と、装置本体2とを備えている。ここでは一例として、毛切断部材3は、毛切断装置1のヘッドに相当し、装置本体2がグリップに相当する。また一例として、毛切断部材3は、装置本体2に対して着脱可能に取り付け可能となっている。ただし、本開示の毛切断装置1において、毛切断部材3が装置本体2に対して着脱可能であることは必須の構成ではなく、毛切断部材3と装置本体2とが一体的に組み付けられていて取り外しできなくてもよい。 As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment includes a hair cutting member 3 and a device main body 2. Here, as an example, the hair cutting member 3 corresponds to the head of the hair cutting device 1, and the device main body 2 corresponds to the grip. Further, as an example, the hair cutting member 3 can be detachably attached to the apparatus main body 2. However, in the hair cutting device 1 of the present disclosure, it is not essential that the hair cutting member 3 is removable from the device main body 2, and the hair cutting member 3 and the device main body 2 are integrally assembled. It does not have to be removable.
 本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1は、図1~図3、及び図5Bに示すように、光放出モジュールM1と、カバー30と、検知領域D2と、検知部D1と、を備えている。ここでは一例として、光放出モジュールM1、検知部D1、及び検知領域D2は、毛切断装置1のヘッドである毛切断部材3に設けられている。 As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 and 5B, the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment includes a light emission module M1, a cover 30, a detection area D2, and a detection unit D1. Here, as an example, the light emission module M1, the detection unit D1, and the detection region D2 are provided on the hair cutting member 3 which is the head of the hair cutting device 1.
 光放出モジュールM1は、図3に示すように、コア部41を含む光導波路4を有している。光放出モジュールM1は、皮膚92から突出する毛91に光を放出することで毛91の切断を行う。 As shown in FIG. 3, the light emission module M1 has an optical waveguide 4 including a core portion 41. The light emitting module M1 cuts the hair 91 by emitting light to the hair 91 protruding from the skin 92.
 カバー30は、光放出モジュールM1を覆うように構成される。検知領域D2は、カバー30内に配置されて、光導波路4内を伝達する光に起因した対象光OB1(図5B参照)が通る。検知部D1は、検知領域D2内の対象光OB1を検知する。 The cover 30 is configured to cover the light emission module M1. The detection region D2 is arranged in the cover 30, and the target light OB1 (see FIG. 5B) caused by the light transmitted in the optical waveguide 4 passes through the detection region D2. The detection unit D1 detects the target light OB1 in the detection area D2.
 毛切断部材3が装置本体2に取り付けられた状態において、装置本体2内に設けられている光源21(図2参照)で発生した光が、光導波路4の先端面(受光面40A:図2参照)に入力されることにより、光導波路4内を光が伝達する。本実施形態では一例として、光源21はレーザ光源であって、光導波路4内を伝達する光はレーザ光である。 When the hair cutting member 3 is attached to the device main body 2, the light generated by the light source 21 (see FIG. 2) provided in the device main body 2 is the tip surface (light receiving surface 40A: FIG. 2) of the optical waveguide 4. By inputting to (see), light is transmitted in the optical waveguide 4. In the present embodiment, as an example, the light source 21 is a laser light source, and the light transmitted in the optical waveguide 4 is a laser beam.
 本実施形態では、上述の通り、毛切断装置1が検知部D1及び検知領域D2を備えていることで、例えば検知部D1の検知結果を利用することができる。例えば、光源21、光放出モジュールM1、又は光学系22(図2参照)等に起こり得る異常、経年劣化、又は汚れ等によって、毛切断装置1の光出力(光放出モジュールM1から放出される光)が低下してしまう可能性がある。検知部D1の検知結果を利用することで、そのような光出力の低下に関する対処(光源21の自動停止や光出力補正といったフィードバック制御、及びユーザ通知等)を行える。結果的に、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置1を提供できる、という利点がある。 In the present embodiment, as described above, since the hair cutting device 1 includes the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2, for example, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used. For example, the light output of the hair cutting device 1 (light emitted from the light emission module M1) due to an abnormality, aged deterioration, dirt, or the like that may occur in the light source 21, the light emission module M1, the optical system 22 (see FIG. 2), or the like. ) May decrease. By using the detection result of the detection unit D1, it is possible to take measures for such a decrease in light output (feedback control such as automatic stop of the light source 21 and light output correction, user notification, etc.). As a result, there is an advantage that the hair cutting device 1 having improved reliability regarding light output can be provided.
 また本実施形態に係る毛切断方法は、光放出ステップと、検知ステップと、を含む。光放出ステップでは、光放出モジュールM1から、皮膚92から突出する毛91に光を放出させることで、毛91の切断を行う。検知ステップでは、カバー30内に配置されて光導波路4内を伝達する光に起因した対象光OB1が通る検知領域D2内の対象光OB1を検知する。ここでは、上記の光放出ステップ及び検知ステップを含む毛切断方法は、毛切断装置1上で用いられる。 Further, the hair cutting method according to the present embodiment includes a light emission step and a detection step. In the light emission step, the hair 91 is cut by emitting light from the light emission module M1 to the hair 91 protruding from the skin 92. In the detection step, the target light OB1 in the detection region D2 through which the target light OB1 caused by the light arranged in the cover 30 and transmitted in the optical waveguide 4 passes is detected. Here, the hair cutting method including the above-mentioned light emission step and detection step is used on the hair cutting device 1.
 この構成においても、毛切断方法が検知ステップを含むことで、検知部D1の検知結果を利用することができる。結果的に、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断方法を提供できる、という利点がある。 Even in this configuration, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used because the hair cutting method includes the detection step. As a result, there is an advantage that a hair cutting method with improved reliability regarding light output can be provided.
 (2)詳細
 以下、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1の詳細について、図1~図12を参照して説明する。
(2) Details Hereinafter, details of the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12.
 以下では一例として、互いに直交するX軸、Y軸及びZ軸の3軸を設定し、特に、光導波路4の長さに沿った軸を「X軸」、毛切断部材3のカバー30の開口部31と皮膚92とが対向したときの対向方向に沿った軸を「Y軸」とする。X軸、Y軸、及びZ軸は、いずれも仮想的な軸であり、図面中の「X」、「Y」、「Z」を示す矢印は、説明のために表記しているに過ぎず、いずれも実体を伴わない。また、これらの方向は毛切断装置1の使用時の方向を限定する趣旨ではない。光導波路4の光軸C1(図2参照)の方向は、X軸に沿った方向である。 In the following, as an example, three axes of X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis that are orthogonal to each other are set, and in particular, the axis along the length of the optical waveguide 4 is "X-axis", and the opening of the cover 30 of the hair cutting member 3 is set. The axis along the facing direction when the portion 31 and the skin 92 face each other is referred to as a “Y axis”. The X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis are all virtual axes, and the arrows indicating "X", "Y", and "Z" in the drawings are shown for illustration purposes only. , Neither is accompanied by substance. Further, these directions are not intended to limit the directions when the hair cutting device 1 is used. The direction of the optical axis C1 (see FIG. 2) of the optical waveguide 4 is a direction along the X axis.
 (2.1)定義
 本開示でいう「毛」は、皮膚92から突出する様々な毛91、つまり皮膚92から延びる様々な毛を含み、例えば、人(人間)の髪の毛、ひげ、眉毛、すね毛、鼻毛又は耳毛等の種々の体毛を含む。さらに、例えば、犬又は猫等のほ乳類、その他の動物においても、その皮膚92から突出する様々な毛91が、本開示でいう「毛」に含まれる。すなわち、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1は、これらの毛91を切断対象とする装置である。また、本開示でいう「皮膚」には、人工皮膚等も含む。本実施形態では一例として、毛切断装置1の切断対象となる毛91が、人の皮膚92から突出する毛、特に成人男性の「ひげ」である場合について説明する。つまり、毛切断装置1の切断対象となる毛91は、人の顔の皮膚92から生えた毛である。顔の皮膚92等を含む人の皮膚92を「肌」ともいう。
(2.1) Definition "Hair" as used in the present disclosure includes various hairs 91 protruding from the skin 92, that is, various hairs extending from the skin 92, and includes, for example, human hair, whiskers, eyebrows, and shins. Includes various body hairs such as hair, nose hair or ear hair. Further, for example, in mammals such as dogs and cats, and other animals, various hairs 91 protruding from the skin 92 are included in the "hair" referred to in the present disclosure. That is, the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment is a device for cutting these hairs 91. Further, the "skin" referred to in the present disclosure includes artificial skin and the like. In the present embodiment, as an example, a case where the hair 91 to be cut by the hair cutting device 1 is a hair protruding from a human skin 92, particularly a “beard” of an adult male, will be described. That is, the hair 91 to be cut by the hair cutting device 1 is the hair grown from the skin 92 of the human face. Human skin 92 including facial skin 92 and the like is also referred to as "skin".
 また、本開示でいう毛91の「切断」は、毛91を切断すること全般を含み、例えば、毛91を根元で切る(つまり、毛をそる)こと、適当な長さで毛91を切り揃えること、及び毛先のみを切ること等を含む。そのため、本開示でいう「毛切断装置」には、例えば、毛91をそるための装置である「シェーバ」又は「てい毛装置」、及び適当な長さで毛を切るための装置である「トリマ」、「バリカン」又は「はさみ」等が含まれる。さらには、本開示でいう毛91の「切断」は、毛91を略平面状の切断面にて2つに切断することだけでなく、毛91の切断部に損傷を与えて毛91を切断部にて破断すること等も含む。本実施形態では一例として、毛切断装置1が、切断対象となる毛91(ひげ)を根元で切る(つまり、毛をそる)ことに適した装置(シェーバ)である場合について説明する。 Further, the "cutting" of the hair 91 in the present disclosure includes cutting the hair 91 in general, for example, cutting the hair 91 at the root (that is, shaving the hair), and cutting the hair 91 to an appropriate length. Includes aligning and cutting only the ends of the hair. Therefore, the "hair cutting device" referred to in the present disclosure includes, for example, a "shaver" or a "hair clipper" which is a device for shaving the hair 91, and a device for cutting hair with an appropriate length. Includes "trima", "hair clippers" or "scissors" and the like. Further, the "cutting" of the hair 91 referred to in the present disclosure not only cuts the hair 91 in two on a substantially planar cut surface, but also damages the cut portion of the hair 91 to cut the hair 91. It also includes breaking at the part. In the present embodiment, as an example, a case where the hair cutting device 1 is a device (shaver) suitable for cutting (that is, shaving) the hair 91 (whisker) to be cut at the root will be described.
 また、本開示でいう「レーザ光」は、誘導放出によって発生する光(Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation)を意味する。レーザ光を発生する光源21としては、例えば、半導体の再結合発光を利用した半導体レーザ(LD:Laser Diode)等がある。レーザ光は、発光ダイオード(LED:Light Emitting Diode)が発生する光に比較して、干渉性(coherence)が高く、出力(パワー密度)が高く、単色性(単一波長)が高く、かつ指向性が高い、という特性を持つ。 Further, the "laser beam" referred to in the present disclosure means light generated by stimulated emission (Light Amplification by Simulated Emission of Radiation). Examples of the light source 21 that generates laser light include a semiconductor laser (LD: Laser Diode) that utilizes recombination light emission of a semiconductor. Compared to light generated by a light emitting diode (LED: Light Emitting Diode), laser light has high coherence, high output (power density), high monochromaticity (single wavelength), and directionality. It has the characteristic of being highly sexual.
 また、本開示でいう「光導波路」は、光を通すことで光を所望の経路に沿って導く光学部材を意味する。光導波路の具体例としては、互いに屈折率の異なるコア及びクラッドを有し、コアをクラッドで覆った光ファイバ等がある。光ファイバは、コアとクラッドとの界面での光の全反射を利用して、コアの内部に光を通すことで所望の経路に沿って光を導くことが可能である。ここで、光導波路は、特に、通信用の信号(光信号)を通す伝送路に限らず、光を所望の経路に沿って導く光学部材全般を意味する。 Further, the "optical waveguide" referred to in the present disclosure means an optical member that guides light along a desired path by passing light. Specific examples of the optical waveguide include an optical fiber having a core and a clad having different refractive indexes from each other and covering the core with a clad. The optical fiber can guide the light along a desired path by passing the light inside the core by utilizing the total reflection of the light at the interface between the core and the clad. Here, the optical waveguide is not limited to a transmission path through which a communication signal (optical signal) is passed, and means an entire optical member that guides light along a desired path.
 また、本開示でいう「保持」は、2つの物体同士が互いの位置関係を保ち続けるように、一方の物体が他方の物体を支持することを意味する。ここで、2つの物体同士の相対的な位置関係は、多少、変化してもよく、一方の物体と他方の物体とが堅牢に固定されていなくてもよい。つまり、保持部材5は、光導波路4と保持部材5との位置関係が多少変化する態様で、光導波路4を保持していてもよい。 Further, "holding" in the present disclosure means that one object supports the other object so that the two objects maintain their positional relationship with each other. Here, the relative positional relationship between the two objects may change slightly, and one object and the other object may not be firmly fixed. That is, the holding member 5 may hold the optical waveguide 4 in such a manner that the positional relationship between the optical waveguide 4 and the holding member 5 changes slightly.
 また、本開示でいう「屈折率」は、真空中の光速度を媒質中の光速度(より正確には位相速度)で除した値である。屈折率は、基本的に、物質に依存して決まっており、例えば、空気の屈折率は「1.0003」であって、水の屈折率は「1.3334」である。同じ物質であっても、屈折率は入射する光の波長によって異なることがあるが、本開示では、特に断りがない限り、屈折率は波長404.7nmの光(水銀のh線)について示すこととする。 Further, the "refractive index" referred to in the present disclosure is a value obtained by dividing the speed of light in a vacuum by the speed of light in a medium (more accurately, the phase velocity). The refractive index is basically determined depending on the substance. For example, the refractive index of air is "1.003" and the refractive index of water is "1.3334". Even for the same substance, the refractive index may differ depending on the wavelength of the incident light, but in the present disclosure, the refractive index is shown for light having a wavelength of 404.7 nm (mercury h-line) unless otherwise specified. And.
 また、本開示でいう「パワー密度」は、単位面積(1cm)あたりの光強度を意味する。パワー密度の単位は「kW/cm」又は「J/(s・cm)」である。光導波路4の断面において光強度の分布にばらつきがある場合でも、光導波路4を通る光強度を光導波路4のコア部41の断面積で除することにより、コア部41の断面全域において平均化された平均的なパワー密度が求まる。本開示では、特に断りがない限り、このように求まる平均的なパワー密度を「パワー密度」とする。 Further, the "power density" referred to in the present disclosure means the light intensity per unit area (1 cm 2). The unit of power density is "kW / cm 2 " or "J / (s · cm 2 )". Even if the distribution of light intensity varies in the cross section of the optical waveguide 4, the light intensity passing through the optical waveguide 4 is divided by the cross-sectional area of the core portion 41 of the optical waveguide 4 to average over the entire cross section of the core portion 41. The average power density obtained can be obtained. In this disclosure, unless otherwise specified, the average power density obtained in this way is referred to as "power density".
 (2.2)全体構成
 ここではまず、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1の全体構成について、図1~図3、図6A、及び図6Bを参照して説明する。
(2.2) Overall Configuration Here, first, the overall configuration of the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3, 6A, and 6B.
 毛切断装置1は、上述したように、毛切断部材3と、装置本体2とを備えている。 As described above, the hair cutting device 1 includes a hair cutting member 3 and a device main body 2.
 毛切断部材3は、光放出モジュールM1と、接続部材としてフェルール71と、ホルダ部H1と、センサ部S1と、検知部D1と、検知領域D2と、を備えている。ホルダ部H1には、光放出モジュールM1及びフェルール71の各々の一部が挿入される。 The hair cutting member 3 includes a light emitting module M1, a ferrule 71 as a connecting member, a holder unit H1, a sensor unit S1, a detection unit D1, and a detection region D2. A part of each of the light emitting module M1 and the ferrule 71 is inserted into the holder portion H1.
 また毛切断部材3は、固定部材F1、接着部材G1、カバー30、及び、固定キャップ34を更に備えている。光放出モジュールM1は、光導波路4と保持部材5とを有している。保持部材5は、光導波路4の後述するコア部41の一部を露出した形態で光導波路4を保持する。また光放出モジュールM1は、固定ブロック32を更に有している。 Further, the hair cutting member 3 further includes a fixing member F1, an adhesive member G1, a cover 30, and a fixing cap 34. The light emission module M1 has an optical waveguide 4 and a holding member 5. The holding member 5 holds the optical waveguide 4 in a form in which a part of the core portion 41 described later of the optical waveguide 4 is exposed. Further, the light emission module M1 further has a fixed block 32.
 装置本体2は、毛切断部材3のフェルール71が機械的に接続される(接続対象部として)レセプタクル部81と、光源21と、光学系22と、ケース20と、を備えている。光源21は、コア部41に導入される光を発生する。光学系22は、光源21とレセプタクル部81との間に配置される。ケース20は、光源21及び光学系22を収容する。 The apparatus main body 2 includes a receptacle portion 81 (as a connection target portion) to which the ferrule 71 of the hair cutting member 3 is mechanically connected (as a connection target portion), a light source 21, an optical system 22, and a case 20. The light source 21 generates light introduced into the core portion 41. The optical system 22 is arranged between the light source 21 and the receptacle section 81. The case 20 houses the light source 21 and the optical system 22.
 光導波路4は、光放出部40(図6A及び図6B参照)を有しており、光源21で発生した光が入力されることによって、光放出部40から光を出力する。毛切断装置1は、光源21で発生した光を、光導波路4に入力し、光導波路4の光放出部40から毛91に放出することで、毛91の切断を行う。 The optical waveguide 4 has a light emitting unit 40 (see FIGS. 6A and 6B), and when the light generated by the light source 21 is input, the light is output from the light emitting unit 40. The hair cutting device 1 cuts the hair 91 by inputting the light generated by the light source 21 into the optical waveguide 4 and emitting the light from the light emitting unit 40 of the optical waveguide 4 to the hair 91.
 より詳細には、毛切断装置1は、光放出部40の屈折率として、切断対象である毛91の屈折率に近い値を採用している。これにより、光放出部40に毛91が接触した状態では、光放出部40から毛91に光が漏れ出し、この光のエネルギで毛91が切断される。一方で、光放出部40に毛91が接触しておらず、光放出部40に空気(屈折率:1.0)のみが接するような状態では、光放出部40と空気との屈折率の差によって、光放出部40からの光の漏れ量が小さく抑えられる。 More specifically, the hair cutting device 1 adopts a value close to the refractive index of the hair 91 to be cut as the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40. As a result, when the hair 91 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40, light leaks from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91, and the hair 91 is cut by the energy of this light. On the other hand, in a state where the hair 91 is not in contact with the light emitting unit 40 and only air (refractive index: 1.0) is in contact with the light emitting unit 40, the refractive index between the light emitting unit 40 and the air is high. Due to the difference, the amount of light leaked from the light emitting unit 40 can be suppressed to a small size.
 ところで、本実施形態では、毛切断部材3が毛切断装置1のヘッドに相当し、装置本体2がグリップに相当する。装置本体2のケース20は、一例として、X軸に沿って長さを有する角柱状に形成されている。 By the way, in the present embodiment, the hair cutting member 3 corresponds to the head of the hair cutting device 1, and the device main body 2 corresponds to the grip. As an example, the case 20 of the apparatus main body 2 is formed in a prismatic shape having a length along the X axis.
 毛切断部材3は、長尺である。毛切断部材3は、X軸に沿って長さを有する。毛切断部材3のカバー30は、図5Aに示すように、その内部に光放出モジュールM1を収容している。またカバー30は、開口部31を有している。カバー30は、光放出モジュールM1を覆うように構成される。開口部31は、コア部41の少なくとも一部を外部に露出させる。ただし、本開示の毛切断装置1において、カバー30が開口部31を有していることは必須ではなく、開口部31は適宜に省略されてもよい。 The hair cutting member 3 is long. The hair cutting member 3 has a length along the X axis. As shown in FIG. 5A, the cover 30 of the hair cutting member 3 houses the light emitting module M1 inside. Further, the cover 30 has an opening 31. The cover 30 is configured to cover the light emission module M1. The opening 31 exposes at least a part of the core 41 to the outside. However, in the hair cutting device 1 of the present disclosure, it is not essential that the cover 30 has the opening 31, and the opening 31 may be omitted as appropriate.
 本実施形態の検知領域D2は、カバー30内に配置されている。特にここでは一例として、検知領域D2は、カバー30内における、光導波路4内を伝達する光の伝達方向A2(図2及び図3参照)の伝達先となる一端側の空間に配置される。言い換えると、カバー30内部の、X軸の正の側の隅には、検知領域D2用の空間が形成されている。ここでは一例として検知領域D2は、開口部31よりもX軸の正の側の、カバー30内部にある。また検知部D1も、カバー30内に配置されている。ここでは一例として検知部D1は、検知領域D2内に配置されている。 The detection area D2 of this embodiment is arranged in the cover 30. In particular, here, as an example, the detection region D2 is arranged in the space on one end side of the cover 30 which is the transmission destination of the light transmission direction A2 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) transmitted in the optical waveguide 4. In other words, a space for the detection region D2 is formed in the positive side corner of the X-axis inside the cover 30. Here, as an example, the detection region D2 is inside the cover 30 on the positive side of the X-axis with respect to the opening 31. Further, the detection unit D1 is also arranged in the cover 30. Here, as an example, the detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2.
 カバー30は、一例として、X軸に沿って長さを有する細長い角筒状に形成されている。本実施形態では、毛切断部材3のフェルール71と、ケース20のレセプタクル部81と、が接続されることにより、毛切断装置1は、Z軸の一方側から見て、全体として略I字状の外観を構成している。 As an example, the cover 30 is formed in the shape of an elongated square cylinder having a length along the X axis. In the present embodiment, by connecting the ferrule 71 of the hair cutting member 3 and the receptacle portion 81 of the case 20, the hair cutting device 1 has a substantially I shape as a whole when viewed from one side of the Z axis. Consists of the appearance of.
 言い換えると、毛切断部材3及びケース20は、それぞれ長尺である。毛切断装置1は、使用形態として、スティック状の形態を有している。スティック状の形態とは、フェルール71がレセプタクル部81に結合された状態において、毛切断部材3の長手方向とケース20の長手方向とが一方向に沿った形態である。 In other words, the hair cutting member 3 and the case 20 are each long. The hair cutting device 1 has a stick-shaped form as a usage form. The stick-shaped form is a form in which the longitudinal direction of the hair cutting member 3 and the longitudinal direction of the case 20 are along one direction in a state where the ferrule 71 is coupled to the receptacle portion 81.
 本実施形態では一例として、ケース20及びカバー30は、いずれも合成樹脂製である。 As an example in this embodiment, the case 20 and the cover 30 are both made of synthetic resin.
 このように、全体として略I字状の外観を有する毛切断装置1は、「直刃かみそり」と同じように使用される。つまり、ユーザは、切断対象となる毛91(ここでは「ひげ」)を切断する(ここでは「そる」)際に、毛切断装置1のグリップ、つまりケース20を片手で握ることで、毛切断装置1を把持する。この状態で、ユーザは、毛切断装置1のヘッド、つまり毛切断部材3のY軸方向の一面をユーザの皮膚92に接触させ、毛切断部材3を皮膚92に沿わせてZ軸方向に移動させることにより、毛切断部材3の光放出部40にて毛91を切断する。このとき、ユーザは、毛切断部材3のうちのY軸の負の向きを向いた面を皮膚92に接触させ、かつ毛切断部材3をZ軸の正の向きに移動させることによって、毛切断部材3(ヘッド)の進行方向の前方(つまりZ軸の正の向き)に位置する毛91を切断する。 As described above, the hair cutting device 1 having a substantially I-shaped appearance as a whole is used in the same manner as the "straight blade razor". That is, when the user cuts the hair 91 (here, “whisker”) to be cut (here, “shave”), the user holds the grip of the hair cutting device 1, that is, the case 20 with one hand to cut the hair. Grasp the device 1. In this state, the user brings the head of the hair cutting device 1, that is, one surface of the hair cutting member 3 in the Y-axis direction into contact with the user's skin 92, and moves the hair cutting member 3 along the skin 92 in the Z-axis direction. By doing so, the hair 91 is cut by the light emitting portion 40 of the hair cutting member 3. At this time, the user touches the skin 92 with the surface of the hair cutting member 3 facing the negative direction of the Y axis, and moves the hair cutting member 3 in the positive direction of the Z axis to cut the hair. The hair 91 located in front of the traveling direction of the member 3 (head) (that is, in the positive direction of the Z axis) is cut.
 毛切断装置1は、使用形態として、スティック状の形態(略I字状の形態)に加えて、別の形態を有してもよい。例えば、装置本体2は、レセプタクル部81の近傍に、所定の角度範囲内で回転可能な軸部を有して、毛切断部材3とケース20とが、略I字状の形態から、略L字状の形態となるように変形可能でもよい。この場合、ユーザは、毛切断装置1の使用形態を、スティック状の形態とL字状の形態とから択一的に変更できる。 The hair cutting device 1 may have another form in addition to the stick-shaped form (substantially I-shaped form) as the usage form. For example, the apparatus main body 2 has a shaft portion that can rotate within a predetermined angle range in the vicinity of the receptacle portion 81, and the hair cutting member 3 and the case 20 have a substantially I-shaped shape and are substantially L. It may be deformable so as to have a character shape. In this case, the user can selectively change the usage pattern of the hair cutting device 1 from a stick-shaped form and an L-shaped form.
 装置本体2は、レセプタクル部81、光源21、光学系22、及びケース20に加えて、制御回路6、電池23、ファン24、ヒートシンク25、操作部26、及び通知部27(図9参照)を更に有している。 In addition to the receptacle section 81, the light source 21, the optical system 22, and the case 20, the apparatus main body 2 includes a control circuit 6, a battery 23, a fan 24, a heat sink 25, an operation section 26, and a notification section 27 (see FIG. 9). I have more.
 制御回路6、光学系22、電池23、ファン24及びヒートシンク25は、いずれもケース20内に収容されている。操作部26は、ケース20の一面(Y軸の負の向きを向いた面)に設けられている。通知部27は、例えば、LED(発光ダイオード)等の表示灯(光源)と、当該表示灯を覆うランプカバーとを含み、例えばケース20の一面に設けられている。毛切断部材3に含まれる光導波路4は、フェルール71と共に、受光面40A(図2参照)側の一端部が、レセプタクル部81に接続されることで、ケース20内の光学系22と対向するように配置される。 The control circuit 6, the optical system 22, the battery 23, the fan 24, and the heat sink 25 are all housed in the case 20. The operation unit 26 is provided on one surface of the case 20 (a surface facing the negative direction of the Y axis). The notification unit 27 includes, for example, an indicator lamp (light source) such as an LED (light emitting diode) and a lamp cover that covers the indicator lamp, and is provided on one surface of the case 20, for example. The optical waveguide 4 included in the hair cutting member 3 faces the optical system 22 in the case 20 by connecting one end portion on the light receiving surface 40A (see FIG. 2) side to the receptacle portion 81 together with the ferrule 71. Arranged like this.
 光源21は、電気エネルギを光エネルギに変換することで、光導波路4に入力される光を発生する。本実施形態では、光源21は、レーザ光源である。つまり、光源21で発生する光は、誘導放出によって発生するレーザ光である。ここでは、光源21は、半導体の再結合発光を利用した半導体レーザからなる。 The light source 21 generates light input to the optical waveguide 4 by converting electrical energy into light energy. In this embodiment, the light source 21 is a laser light source. That is, the light generated by the light source 21 is a laser beam generated by stimulated emission. Here, the light source 21 is composed of a semiconductor laser that utilizes recombination light emission of a semiconductor.
 また、光源21で発生する光の波長は、400nm以上である。つまり、光源21は、400nmよりも長波長側にピーク波長又はドミナント波長を有するレーザ光を発生する。本実施形態では、光源21で発生する光の波長は、700nm以下である。例えば波長が400nm以上450nm以下の範囲にある光であれば、皮膚92に存在するアクネ菌等に対する殺菌作用が期待できる。また、波長が450nm以上700nm以下の範囲にある光であれば、皮膚92の活性化作用が期待できる。 Further, the wavelength of the light generated by the light source 21 is 400 nm or more. That is, the light source 21 generates a laser beam having a peak wavelength or a dominant wavelength on the wavelength side longer than 400 nm. In the present embodiment, the wavelength of the light generated by the light source 21 is 700 nm or less. For example, light having a wavelength in the range of 400 nm or more and 450 nm or less can be expected to have a bactericidal action against P. acnes and the like present on the skin 92. Further, if the light has a wavelength in the range of 450 nm or more and 700 nm or less, the skin 92 can be expected to have an activating effect.
 制御回路6は、少なくとも光源21を制御する回路である。制御回路6は、光源21に電力を供給することで光源21を発光(点灯)させる。さらに、制御回路6は、光源21の点灯/消灯の切り替え、及び光源21の出力(明るさ又は波長等)の調節等を行う。制御回路6は、プリント配線板(基板)と、プリント配線板に実装された複数の電子部品と、を含んでいる。制御回路6は、光源21の他、ファン24及び操作部26等の制御も行う。制御回路6について詳しくは、「(2.6)制御回路」の欄で説明する。 The control circuit 6 is a circuit that controls at least the light source 21. The control circuit 6 causes the light source 21 to emit light (lights up) by supplying electric power to the light source 21. Further, the control circuit 6 switches the lighting / extinguishing of the light source 21 and adjusts the output (brightness, wavelength, etc.) of the light source 21. The control circuit 6 includes a printed wiring board (board) and a plurality of electronic components mounted on the printed wiring board. In addition to the light source 21, the control circuit 6 also controls the fan 24, the operation unit 26, and the like. The control circuit 6 will be described in detail in the column of “(2.6) Control circuit”.
 光学系22は、光源21とレセプタクル部81との間に配置されており、光源21からの光を光導波路4へと導く。光学系22は、複数のレンズを含んでいる。図3の例では、光学系22は、第1レンズ221、第2レンズ222、第3レンズ223及び第4レンズ224を含んでいる。ただし、図3は、個々のレンズの形状及び配置を厳密には示しておらず、光学系22を模式的に示しているに過ぎない。 The optical system 22 is arranged between the light source 21 and the receptacle section 81, and guides the light from the light source 21 to the optical waveguide 4. The optical system 22 includes a plurality of lenses. In the example of FIG. 3, the optical system 22 includes a first lens 221, a second lens 222, a third lens 223, and a fourth lens 224. However, FIG. 3 does not show exactly the shape and arrangement of the individual lenses, but merely schematically shows the optical system 22.
 電池23は、制御回路6、光源21及びファン24等の駆動用の電力を供給する電源として機能する。本実施形態では一例として、電池23は、充電及び放電が可能な、リチウムイオン電池(LIB:Lithium Ion Battery)等の二次電池である。 The battery 23 functions as a power source for supplying electric power for driving the control circuit 6, the light source 21, the fan 24, and the like. As an example in the present embodiment, the battery 23 is a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery (LIB: Lithium Ion Battery) that can be charged and discharged.
 ファン24は、光源21の冷却用の冷却ファンである。具体的には、ファン24は、ケース20内においてヒートシンク25を通る気流を発生することにより、ヒートシンク25の放熱を促進する。 The fan 24 is a cooling fan for cooling the light source 21. Specifically, the fan 24 promotes heat dissipation of the heat sink 25 by generating an air flow passing through the heat sink 25 in the case 20.
 ヒートシンク25は、熱伝導率が比較的に高い材質、例えば、アルミニウム等で構成されている。ヒートシンク25は、光源21と熱的に結合されており、主として光源21の放熱を行う。 The heat sink 25 is made of a material having a relatively high thermal conductivity, for example, aluminum or the like. The heat sink 25 is thermally coupled to the light source 21 and mainly dissipates heat from the light source 21.
 操作部26は、ユーザの操作を受け付けて、ユーザの操作に応じた電気信号を制御回路6に出力する。本実施形態では一例として、操作部26は、プッシュスイッチ又はスライドスイッチ等のメカニカルスイッチを少なくとも1つ有している。 The operation unit 26 receives the user's operation and outputs an electric signal corresponding to the user's operation to the control circuit 6. As an example in the present embodiment, the operation unit 26 has at least one mechanical switch such as a push switch or a slide switch.
 通知部27は、制御回路6からの制御下で、表示灯(光源)の発光色の切り替え、又は点灯状態を連続点灯から点滅点灯への切り替え等を行うことにより、検知部D1の検知結果に対応した情報をユーザに通知する。 Under the control of the control circuit 6, the notification unit 27 switches the emission color of the indicator light (light source), switches the lighting state from continuous lighting to blinking lighting, and the like, thereby producing the detection result of the detection unit D1. Notify the user of the corresponding information.
 開口部31(図1参照)は、カバー30のうち、ユーザの皮膚92に接触する面(つまりY軸の負の側を向いた面)に配置される。開口部31は、X軸に沿って長さを有する長方形状に形成されている。この開口部31を通して、カバー30の内側の空間(収容空間SP1:図5A参照)と外側の空間とがつながることになる。 The opening 31 (see FIG. 1) is arranged on the surface of the cover 30 that comes into contact with the user's skin 92 (that is, the surface facing the negative side of the Y axis). The opening 31 is formed in a rectangular shape having a length along the X axis. Through this opening 31, the space inside the cover 30 (accommodation space SP1: see FIG. 5A) and the space outside are connected.
 光導波路4の一部、保持部材5及び固定ブロック32は、カバー30内に収容されている。毛切断部材3が装置本体2に取り付けられることで、光導波路4の受光面40Aは、装置本体2のケース20内において、光学系22の第4レンズ224と近接して対向する。要するに、毛切断部材3が装置本体2に取り付けられることで、光導波路4は、光学系22を介して、光源21と光学的に結合される。その結果、光源21からの光は、光導波路4(コア部41)を通って伝播される。本実施形態ではコア部41に加えて、保持部材5及び固定ブロック32も、開口部31を通してカバー30の外部に露出する。 A part of the optical waveguide 4, the holding member 5, and the fixing block 32 are housed in the cover 30. By attaching the hair cutting member 3 to the apparatus main body 2, the light receiving surface 40A of the optical waveguide 4 faces the fourth lens 224 of the optical system 22 in close proximity to the case 20 of the apparatus main body 2. In short, by attaching the hair cutting member 3 to the apparatus main body 2, the optical waveguide 4 is optically coupled to the light source 21 via the optical system 22. As a result, the light from the light source 21 is propagated through the optical waveguide 4 (core portion 41). In the present embodiment, in addition to the core portion 41, the holding member 5 and the fixing block 32 are also exposed to the outside of the cover 30 through the opening portion 31.
 光導波路4は、光源21で発生した光を通すことで、光源21からの光を所望の経路に沿って導く光学部材である。本実施形態では一例として、光導波路4は光ファイバである。この光導波路4は、コア部41及びクラッド部42を有しており、クラッド部42は、コア部41の少なくとも一部(ここでは一部)を覆っている。またコア部41は、クラッド部42の外周の側に偏芯して配置される。ここでは一例として、コア部41は、クラッド部42の外周部に配置されて、コア部41の一部が外周部から露出する。具体的には図6Bに示すように、コア部41の、周方向における一部の領域が、クラッド部42の外周面420よりも外側に突出するように偏芯して配置される。 The optical waveguide 4 is an optical member that guides the light from the light source 21 along a desired path by passing the light generated by the light source 21. As an example in this embodiment, the optical waveguide 4 is an optical fiber. The optical waveguide 4 has a core portion 41 and a clad portion 42, and the clad portion 42 covers at least a part (here, a part) of the core portion 41. Further, the core portion 41 is arranged eccentrically on the outer peripheral side of the clad portion 42. Here, as an example, the core portion 41 is arranged on the outer peripheral portion of the clad portion 42, and a part of the core portion 41 is exposed from the outer peripheral portion. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6B, a part of the core portion 41 in the circumferential direction is eccentrically arranged so as to project outward from the outer peripheral surface 420 of the clad portion 42.
 光導波路4は、X軸方向における一端面(受光面40A)から、他端面(終端面40B)にわたって、コア部41の周方向における一部の領域が、クラッド部42の外周面420よりも外側に突出するように偏芯して配置されている。 In the optical waveguide 4, from one end surface (light receiving surface 40A) in the X-axis direction to the other end surface (end surface 40B), a part of the circumferential direction of the core portion 41 is outside the outer peripheral surface 420 of the clad portion 42. It is arranged eccentrically so as to project to.
 光導波路4は、クラッド部42の外周を保護する保護シース(樹脂製の被覆部材)を更に有してもよい。つまり、本実施形態の光導波路4として用いられる光ファイバは、コア部41とクラッド部42との二重構造であるが、クラッド部42の外側に位置する保護シースを加えて、三重構造を有してもよい。ただし、光導波路4の、少なくとも開口部31から露出される部位は、保護シースが除去されてコア部41及びクラッド部42が露出されることが好ましい。 The optical waveguide 4 may further have a protective sheath (resin covering member) that protects the outer periphery of the clad portion 42. That is, the optical fiber used as the optical waveguide 4 of the present embodiment has a double structure of the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42, but has a triple structure by adding a protective sheath located outside the clad portion 42. You may. However, it is preferable that the protective sheath is removed and the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are exposed at least in the portion of the optical waveguide 4 exposed from the opening 31.
 保持部材5は、光導波路4を保持する部材である。ここでは保持部材5は、光導波路4のうち、長手方向における一部と接触して光導波路4を保持する。以下、図3に示すように、光導波路4を、X軸方向に沿って3つの領域(第1領域401、第2領域402、第3領域403)に分割して説明する。 The holding member 5 is a member that holds the optical waveguide 4. Here, the holding member 5 contacts a part of the optical waveguide 4 in the longitudinal direction to hold the optical waveguide 4. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 3, the optical waveguide 4 will be described by dividing it into three regions (first region 401, second region 402, and third region 403) along the X-axis direction.
 光導波路4の第1領域401は、図3に示すように、保持部材5と接触して保持される領域である。光放出部40は、第1領域401の範囲内にある。 As shown in FIG. 3, the first region 401 of the optical waveguide 4 is a region that is held in contact with the holding member 5. The light emitting unit 40 is within the range of the first region 401.
 光導波路4の第2領域402及び第3領域403は、保持部材5からX軸の負の方向にはみ出た領域である。第3領域403は、フェルール71内で接着部材G1によって接着されて固定される領域である。第3領域403は、フェルール71によって位置決めされる領域となる。 The second region 402 and the third region 403 of the optical waveguide 4 are regions protruding from the holding member 5 in the negative direction of the X-axis. The third region 403 is a region bonded and fixed by the adhesive member G1 in the ferrule 71. The third region 403 is a region positioned by the ferrule 71.
 第2領域402は、第1領域401と第3領域403との間の領域であり、保持部材5とフェルール71との間に介在する。第2領域402は、湾曲した部位である。第2領域402は、ホルダ部H1内で固定部材F1によって固定されている。すなわち、光導波路4は、第1領域401と第3領域403とがY軸方向において「ずれた」形態で配置されている。したがって、コア部41の光軸に関して、第1領域401における光軸C1(図2参照)と、第3領域403における光軸とは、互いに非同軸である。 The second region 402 is a region between the first region 401 and the third region 403, and is interposed between the holding member 5 and the ferrule 71. The second region 402 is a curved portion. The second region 402 is fixed by the fixing member F1 in the holder portion H1. That is, in the optical waveguide 4, the first region 401 and the third region 403 are arranged in a "shifted" manner in the Y-axis direction. Therefore, with respect to the optical axis of the core portion 41, the optical axis C1 (see FIG. 2) in the first region 401 and the optical axis in the third region 403 are non-coaxial with each other.
 保持部材5は、固定ブロック32に固定されている。保持部材5は、固定ブロック32に対して、接着、溶着、貼り付け又は締結部材(ねじ等)を用いた結合等の適宜の手段にて、固定されている。これにより、光導波路4(第1領域401)は、保持部材5を介して固定ブロック32に間接的に固定されることになる。 The holding member 5 is fixed to the fixing block 32. The holding member 5 is fixed to the fixing block 32 by an appropriate means such as adhesion, welding, pasting, or bonding using a fastening member (screw or the like). As a result, the optical waveguide 4 (first region 401) is indirectly fixed to the fixing block 32 via the holding member 5.
 固定ブロック32は、カバー30に固定されている。固定ブロック32は、合成樹脂製であって(金属製でもよい)、X軸に沿って長さを有する角柱状に形成されている。固定ブロック32は、カバー30に対して、接着、溶着、貼り付け又は締結部材(ねじ等)を用いた結合等の適宜の手段にて、固定されている。固定ブロック32には、上述したように保持部材5が固定されている。そのため、光導波路4(第1領域401)は、保持部材5及び固定ブロック32を介してカバー30に間接的に固定されることになる。 The fixed block 32 is fixed to the cover 30. The fixing block 32 is made of synthetic resin (may be made of metal), and is formed in a prismatic shape having a length along the X axis. The fixing block 32 is fixed to the cover 30 by an appropriate means such as adhesion, welding, pasting, or bonding using a fastening member (screw or the like). As described above, the holding member 5 is fixed to the fixed block 32. Therefore, the optical waveguide 4 (first region 401) is indirectly fixed to the cover 30 via the holding member 5 and the fixing block 32.
 ここで、毛切断部材3は、光導波路4の光放出部40、保持部材5及び固定ブロック32の全てが、開口部31を通してカバー30の外部に露出する。具体的には、固定ブロック32は、カバー30における開口部31の長さ(X軸)に沿って配置されている。そして、保持部材5は、固定ブロック32における毛切断装置1の進行方向の前方(Z軸の正の向き)を向いた面に固定されている。しかも、固定ブロック32及び保持部材5は、開口部31の短手方向(Z軸方向)において、毛切断装置1(毛切断部材3)の進行方向の前方側に隙間を確保するように、毛切断装置1の進行方向の後方側(つまりZ軸の負の側)に寄せて配置されている。 Here, in the hair cutting member 3, all of the light emitting portion 40, the holding member 5, and the fixing block 32 of the optical waveguide 4 are exposed to the outside of the cover 30 through the opening 31. Specifically, the fixed block 32 is arranged along the length (X-axis) of the opening 31 in the cover 30. The holding member 5 is fixed to the surface of the fixing block 32 facing forward (positive direction of the Z axis) in the traveling direction of the hair cutting device 1. Moreover, the fixing block 32 and the holding member 5 have hairs so as to secure a gap on the front side in the traveling direction of the hair cutting device 1 (hair cutting member 3) in the lateral direction (Z-axis direction) of the opening 31. It is arranged closer to the rear side (that is, the negative side of the Z axis) of the cutting device 1 in the traveling direction.
 また、固定ブロック32及び保持部材5は、Y軸の負の向きを向いた面が、カバー30におけるY軸の負の向きを向いた面と面一になるように、配置されている。さらに、光導波路4(光放出部40)は、図6Aに示すように、保持部材5における毛切断装置1の進行方向の前方(Z軸の正の向き)を向いた面に固定されている。 Further, the fixing block 32 and the holding member 5 are arranged so that the surface of the cover 30 facing the negative direction of the Y axis is flush with the surface of the cover 30 facing the negative direction of the Y axis. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the optical waveguide 4 (light emitting unit 40) is fixed to the surface of the holding member 5 facing the front (positive direction of the Z axis) of the hair cutting device 1 in the traveling direction. ..
 また図2及び図3では図示を省略しているが、毛切断装置1は、例えば、電池23用の充電回路、又は、毛切断装置1の動作状態を表示するための表示部等の構成要素を更に備えていてもよい。 Although not shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the hair cutting device 1 is, for example, a component such as a charging circuit for a battery 23 or a display unit for displaying an operating state of the hair cutting device 1. May be further provided.
 (2.3)毛切断部材
 (2.3.1)毛切断部材の構成
 次に、毛切断部材3のより詳細な構成について、図1~図6Bを参照して説明する。
(2.3) Hair Cutting Member (2.3.1) Configuration of Hair Cutting Member Next, a more detailed configuration of the hair cutting member 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 6B.
 図1は、毛切断装置1の、Y軸方向の負の側から正の向きに見た図(正面図)である。図4は、毛切断部材3が、装置本体2のレセプタクル部81から分離した状態の、Y軸方向の正の側から負の向きに見た図(背面図)である。 FIG. 1 is a view (front view) of the hair cutting device 1 viewed from the negative side in the Y-axis direction in the positive direction. FIG. 4 is a view (rear view) of the hair cutting member 3 separated from the receptacle portion 81 of the apparatus main body 2 as viewed from the positive side in the Y-axis direction in the negative direction.
 図5Aは、光放出モジュールM1を収容するカバー30をその長手方向における略中央でY-Z平面に沿って切った断面図(図5Bの5A-5A線断面図)である。図5Bは、光放出モジュールM1を収容するカバー30を、Y軸方向の負の側から正の向きに見た図(正面図)である。図6Aは、毛切断部材3における光導波路4及び保持部材5周辺の構成を示す概略断面図である。図6Bは、図6Aの要部の拡大図である。 FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view (5A-5A line cross-sectional view of FIG. 5B) in which the cover 30 accommodating the light emission module M1 is cut along the YZ plane at substantially the center in the longitudinal direction thereof. FIG. 5B is a view (front view) of the cover 30 accommodating the light emission module M1 as viewed from the negative side in the Y-axis direction in the positive direction. FIG. 6A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing the configuration around the optical waveguide 4 and the holding member 5 in the hair cutting member 3. FIG. 6B is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 6A.
 本実施形態では、毛切断部材3は、上述の通り、光放出モジュールM1と、フェルール71と、ホルダ部H1と、固定部材F1と、接着部材G1と、カバー30と、固定キャップ34と、センサ部S1と、検知部D1と、検知領域D2と、を備えている。 In the present embodiment, as described above, the hair cutting member 3 includes a light emitting module M1, a ferrule 71, a holder portion H1, a fixing member F1, an adhesive member G1, a cover 30, a fixing cap 34, and a sensor. A unit S1, a detection unit D1, and a detection area D2 are provided.
 光放出モジュールM1は、光導波路4と保持部材5と固定ブロック32とを有している。特に光導波路4は、皮膚92から突出する毛91に光を放出することで毛91の切断を行うように配置される。 The light emission module M1 has an optical waveguide 4, a holding member 5, and a fixed block 32. In particular, the optical waveguide 4 is arranged so as to cut the hair 91 by emitting light to the hair 91 protruding from the skin 92.
 (2.3.2)光導波路
 光放出モジュールM1の光導波路4は、上述したように、毛91に光を放出することで毛91の切断を行う光放出部40を有している。本実施形態では、光導波路4は、コア部41と、クラッド部42と、を有する光ファイバである。
(2.3.2) Optical Waveguide The optical waveguide 4 of the optical waveguide module M1 has, as described above, a light emitting unit 40 that cuts the hair 91 by emitting light to the hair 91. In the present embodiment, the optical waveguide 4 is an optical fiber having a core portion 41 and a clad portion 42.
 クラッド部42は、受光面40Aから終端面40Bにわたって、一部を除くコア部41の周囲を覆っている。ここで、コア部41及びクラッド部42は、いずれも比較的に高い光透過性を有している。ただし、コア部41とクラッド部42とでは屈折率が異なっており、コア部41の屈折率は、クラッド部42の屈折率よりも大きい。この構成により、受光面40Aからコア部41に入射した光は、コア部41とクラッド部42との界面での全反射又は屈折により、極力、コア部41のみを通るようにして光導波路4の先端部(受光面40Aとは反対側にある終端面40Bを含む端部)まで到達する。 The clad portion 42 covers the periphery of the core portion 41 except for a part from the light receiving surface 40A to the terminal surface 40B. Here, both the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 have relatively high light transmittance. However, the refractive index of the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are different, and the refractive index of the core portion 41 is larger than that of the clad portion 42. With this configuration, the light incident on the core portion 41 from the light receiving surface 40A is totally reflected or refracted at the interface between the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 so that only the core portion 41 passes through the optical waveguide 4 as much as possible. It reaches the tip portion (the end portion including the end surface 40B on the opposite side of the light receiving surface 40A).
 光導波路4は、例えば、コア部41及びクラッド部42のいずれもが合成石英からなる。例えば、コア部41は合成石英製であって、クラッド部42は、コア部41とは屈折率が異なる、不純物を添加した合成石英製である。本実施形態では一例として、ファイバ入射NA(Numerical Aperture)が「0.1」の場合、コア部41の屈折率は「1.4698」であって、クラッド部42の屈折率は「1.4309」である。また、ファイバ入射NAが「0.2」の場合、コア部41の屈折率は「1.4698」であって、クラッド部42の屈折率は「1.309」である。ここで挙げるNA及び屈折率は、あくまで一例に過ぎず、コア部41の屈折率とクラッド部42の屈折率との差等を規定する趣旨ではない。 In the optical waveguide 4, for example, both the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are made of synthetic quartz. For example, the core portion 41 is made of synthetic quartz, and the clad portion 42 is made of synthetic quartz having an impurity added, which has a different refractive index from that of the core portion 41. In the present embodiment, as an example, when the fiber incident NA (Numerical Aperture) is "0.1", the refractive index of the core portion 41 is "1.4698" and the refractive index of the clad portion 42 is "1.4309". ". When the fiber incident NA is "0.2", the refractive index of the core portion 41 is "1.4698" and the refractive index of the clad portion 42 is "1.309". The NA and the refractive index mentioned here are merely examples, and do not mean to define the difference between the refractive index of the core portion 41 and the refractive index of the clad portion 42.
 コア部41は、図3に示すように、クラッド部42の外周の側に偏芯して配置される。受光面40Aから見て、コア部41及びクラッド部42は、それぞれ円形状である。ただし、受光面40Aから見て、コア部41は、その外周部がカットされてD字状に形成されていてもよい。受光面40Aは、フェルール71の端面710と面一である。 As shown in FIG. 3, the core portion 41 is arranged eccentrically on the outer peripheral side of the clad portion 42. Seen from the light receiving surface 40A, the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are each circular. However, when viewed from the light receiving surface 40A, the outer peripheral portion of the core portion 41 may be cut to form a D shape. The light receiving surface 40A is flush with the end surface 710 of the ferrule 71.
 本実施形態では一例として、コア部41の径は、約10μmであり、クラッド部42の径は、約50μm~125μmであるとするが、これらの数値に限定されない。 In the present embodiment, as an example, the diameter of the core portion 41 is about 10 μm, and the diameter of the clad portion 42 is about 50 μm to 125 μm, but the diameter is not limited to these values.
 コア部41は、クラッド部42の外周部に配置されて、コア部41の一部が外周部から露出する。したがって、光導波路4を通る光が、その露出する一部を通じて外部に漏れやすくなる。 The core portion 41 is arranged on the outer peripheral portion of the clad portion 42, and a part of the core portion 41 is exposed from the outer peripheral portion. Therefore, the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is likely to leak to the outside through the exposed part thereof.
 光導波路4のうち、保持部材5にて覆われる部位は、毛91に光を漏らすことができないため、毛91に光を放出する光放出部40として機能しない。本実施形態ではコア部41のうち、クラッド部42に覆われずに露出し、さらにホルダ部H1及びフェルール71にも覆われずに露出した部位が、光放出部40となる。図6A及び図6B等においては、光放出部40を含む光導波路4、及び保持部材5を、Y-Z平面で切った断面を示す。 Of the optical waveguide 4, the portion covered by the holding member 5 cannot leak light to the hair 91, and therefore does not function as a light emitting unit 40 that emits light to the hair 91. In the present embodiment, the portion of the core portion 41 that is exposed without being covered by the clad portion 42 and is not covered by the holder portion H1 and the ferrule 71 is the light emitting portion 40. 6A and 6B show cross sections of the optical waveguide 4 including the light emitting unit 40 and the holding member 5 cut in a YY plane.
 光放出部40の屈折率は、皮膚92の表面921(図6A参照)の屈折率よりも小さい。ここで、人の皮膚92(肌)は、表皮、真皮及び皮下組織等を含んでいる。ここでいう皮膚92の表面921は、これら皮膚92を構成する複数の要素のうち最も外側に位置する表皮、又は表皮の表面を意味する。 The refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the surface 921 (see FIG. 6A) of the skin 92. Here, the human skin 92 (skin) includes the epidermis, the dermis, the subcutaneous tissue, and the like. The surface 921 of the skin 92 referred to here means the epidermis located on the outermost side among the plurality of elements constituting the skin 92, or the surface of the epidermis.
 すなわち、光放出部40は、コア部41及びクラッド部42を有する光導波路4(光ファイバ)のうちのコア部41からなるので、コア部41の屈折率は皮膚92の表面921の屈折率よりも小さくなるように設定される。一例として、人の皮膚92の表面921の屈折率は「1.4770」であると仮定する。そうすると、光放出部40であるコア部41の屈折率が上述したように「1.4698」であれば、光放出部40の屈折率が皮膚92の表面921の屈折率より小さい、という条件は満足する。 That is, since the light emitting portion 40 is composed of the core portion 41 of the optical waveguide 4 (optical fiber) having the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42, the refractive index of the core portion 41 is higher than the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92. Is also set to be small. As an example, it is assumed that the refractive index of the surface 921 of human skin 92 is "1.4770". Then, if the refractive index of the core portion 41, which is the light emitting portion 40, is "1.4698" as described above, the condition that the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 is satisfied. I am satisfied.
 より詳細には、本実施形態では、光放出部40の屈折率は、1.47以下である。要するに、光放出部40の屈折率が皮膚92の表面921の屈折率よりも小さくなるように、光放出部40の屈折率は「1.4700」以下の範囲に設定されている。これにより、皮膚92の表面921の屈折率に多少のばらつきがあっても、光放出部40の屈折率は、皮膚92の表面921の屈折率よりも小さくなる。つまり、皮膚92の表面921の屈折率が「1.4770」よりもわずかに小さい場合でも、光放出部40の屈折率が皮膚92の表面921の屈折率よりも小さい、という条件は満足できる。 More specifically, in the present embodiment, the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 is 1.47 or less. In short, the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 is set in the range of "1.4700" or less so that the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92. As a result, even if the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 varies slightly, the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 becomes smaller than the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92. That is, even when the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 is slightly smaller than "1.4770", the condition that the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 can be satisfied.
 さらに、ここでいう皮膚92の表面921の屈折率は、毛91の屈折率よりも小さい。つまり、皮膚92の表面921と、皮膚92から突出する切断対象である毛91と、光放出部40(コア部41)と、の三者で屈折率を比較すると、毛91の屈折率が最も大きく、次に皮膚92の表面921の屈折率が大きく、光放出部40の屈折率が最も小さい。一例として、毛切断装置1での切断対象である人の毛91(ここでは「ひげ」)の屈折率は「1.5432」であると仮定する。そうすると、人の皮膚92の表面921の屈折率が「1.4770」であれば、皮膚92の表面921の屈折率が毛91の屈折率よりも小さい、という条件は満足する。 Further, the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 referred to here is smaller than the refractive index of the hair 91. That is, when the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92, the hair 91 to be cut protruding from the skin 92, and the light emitting portion 40 (core portion 41) are compared, the refractive index of the hair 91 is the highest. Next, the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 is large, and the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 is the smallest. As an example, it is assumed that the refractive index of the human hair 91 (here, “whisker”) to be cut by the hair cutting device 1 is “1.5432”. Then, if the refractive index of the surface 921 of the human skin 92 is "1.4770", the condition that the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 is smaller than the refractive index of the hair 91 is satisfied.
 要するに、本実施形態では、屈折率の関係としては「光放出部<皮膚<毛」のように、光放出部40(コア部41)よりも皮膚92の表面921の方が屈折率は大きく、皮膚92の表面921よりも毛91の方が更に屈折率は大きくなる。つまり、光放出部40の屈折率は、切断対象である毛91の屈折率よりも小さく、かつ皮膚92の表面921の屈折率よりも小さい。 In short, in the present embodiment, as for the relationship of the refractive index, the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 is larger than that of the light emitting portion 40 (core portion 41), as in the case of “light emitting portion <skin <hair”. The refractive index of the hair 91 is higher than that of the surface 921 of the skin 92. That is, the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the hair 91 to be cut and smaller than the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92.
 このように毛切断装置1においては、光放出部40の屈折率は、切断対象である毛91の屈折率よりも小さいので、光放出部40に毛91が接触した状態では、光放出部40から毛91に光が漏れ出すことになる。したがって、光放出部40から毛91に漏れ出した光のエネルギで、毛91が切断されることになる。毛91が切断される原理(メカニズム)については「(2.4)使用例」の欄で詳しく説明する。一方で、光放出部40に毛91が接触しておらず、光放出部40に空気(屈折率:1.0)のみが接するような状態では、光放出部40と空気との屈折率の差によって、光放出部40からの光の漏れ量が小さく抑えられる。 As described above, in the hair cutting device 1, the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the hair 91 to be cut. Therefore, when the hair 91 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40, the light emitting unit 40 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40. Light leaks from the hair 91. Therefore, the hair 91 is cut by the energy of the light leaked from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91. The principle (mechanism) of cutting the hair 91 will be described in detail in the column of "(2.4) Usage example". On the other hand, in a state where the hair 91 is not in contact with the light emitting unit 40 and only air (refractive index: 1.0) is in contact with the light emitting unit 40, the refractive index between the light emitting unit 40 and the air is high. Due to the difference, the amount of light leaked from the light emitting unit 40 can be suppressed to a small size.
 さらに、屈折率の関係として、より好ましくは、光放出部40の屈折率と、切断対象である毛91の屈折率との差は、極力小さい方がよい。つまり、皮膚92の表面921と、毛91と、光放出部40と、の三者では、屈折率が上述したような大小関係を満たしつつも、その差は極力小さいことが好ましい。これにより、光放出部40の屈折率は、切断対象である毛91の屈折率に近い値となり、光放出部40に毛91が接触した状態では、光放出部40から毛91に光が漏れ出しやすくなる。 Further, as for the relationship of the refractive index, it is more preferable that the difference between the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 and the refractive index of the hair 91 to be cut is as small as possible. That is, it is preferable that the difference between the surface 921 of the skin 92, the hair 91, and the light emitting portion 40 is as small as possible while satisfying the magnitude relationship as described above in the refractive index. As a result, the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 becomes a value close to the refractive index of the hair 91 to be cut, and when the hair 91 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40, light leaks from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91. It will be easier to put out.
 ここでは一例として、光放出部40(コア部41)の屈折率は「1.4698」、皮膚92の表面921の屈折率は「1.4770」、毛91の屈折率は「1.5432」であり、光放出部40の屈折率と皮膚92の表面921の屈折率とは同程度であると言える。ここで、「屈折率が同程度」とは、互いに異なる2つの屈折率があった場合において、大きい方の屈折率の±5%の範囲内に、小さい方の屈折率が含まれる程度に、両者が近しい値をとることをいう。この場合、例えば、光の入射角(皮膚92の表面921の法線との間の角度)を80度(入射NAは約0.17)とすると、毛91の屈折率の-5%の屈折率をもつ物体と毛91との界面での反射率(s偏光)が13.2%、光放出部40と毛91との界面での反射率(s偏光)が12.5%、皮膚92と毛91との界面での反射率(s偏光)が11.3%となる。このように、屈折率が-5%変化しても、反射率は2%しか変化しない。つまり、本実施形態では、光放出部40の屈折率(1.4698)及び皮膚92の表面921の屈折率は、毛91の屈折率(1.5432)の±5%の範囲にあるため、同程度にあると言える。 Here, as an example, the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 (core portion 41) is "1.4698", the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 is "1.4770", and the refractive index of the hair 91 is "1.5432". Therefore, it can be said that the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 and the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 are about the same. Here, "the same degree of refractive index" means that when there are two different refractive indexes, the smaller refractive index is included in the range of ± 5% of the larger refractive index. It means that both take close values. In this case, for example, assuming that the incident angle of light (the angle between the normal line of the surface 921 of the skin 92) is 80 degrees (incident NA is about 0.17), the refraction of -5% of the refractive index of the hair 91 is performed. The refractive index (s-polarization) at the interface between the object having the rate and the hair 91 is 13.2%, the reflectance (s-polarization) at the interface between the light emitting unit 40 and the hair 91 is 12.5%, and the skin 92. The refractive index (s-polarization) at the interface between the hair 91 and the hair 91 is 11.3%. Thus, even if the refractive index changes by −5%, the reflectance changes by only 2%. That is, in the present embodiment, the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 (1.4698) and the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92 are in the range of ± 5% of the refractive index of the hair 91 (1.5432). It can be said that they are at the same level.
 ちなみに、「(2.1)定義」の欄で説明したように、同じ物質であっても屈折率は波長によって異なるが、上述した屈折率の関係は、少なくとも光源21から出力される光の波長の範囲においては不変である。すなわち、少なくとも光源21から出力される光の波長の範囲(例えば、400nm以上700nm以下の範囲)においては、屈折率は「光放出部<皮膚<毛」との関係を満たす。 Incidentally, as described in the column of "(2.1) Definition", the refractive index differs depending on the wavelength even if the substance is the same, but the above-mentioned relationship of the refractive index is at least the wavelength of the light output from the light source 21. It is invariant in the range of. That is, at least in the wavelength range of the light output from the light source 21 (for example, in the range of 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less), the refractive index satisfies the relationship with the “light emitting portion <skin <hair”.
 さらに、クラッド部42の屈折率は光放出部40であるコア部41の屈折率よりも小さいので、上述した条件を満たす場合には、コア部41、クラッド部42、皮膚92の表面921、及び毛91の四者の中では、クラッド部42の屈折率が最小となる。つまり、四者の屈折率の関係は「クラッド部<コア部<皮膚<毛」となる。 Further, since the refractive index of the clad portion 42 is smaller than the refractive index of the core portion 41 which is the light emitting portion 40, the core portion 41, the clad portion 42, the surface 921 of the skin 92, and the surface 921 of the skin 92 are satisfied if the above conditions are satisfied. Among the four hairs 91, the refractive index of the clad portion 42 is the smallest. That is, the relationship between the refractive indexes of the four parties is "clad portion <core portion <skin <hair".
 ところで、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1では、少なくとも毛91の切断時において、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は50kW/cm以上である。すなわち、コア部41及びクラッド部42を有する光導波路4においては、コア部41の内部を光が通ることになるため、コア部41の断面における単位面積(1cm)あたりの光強度が、50kW以上となる。ここで、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、常に、50kW/cm以上である必要はなく、少なくとも毛91の切断を行う際(毛91の切断時)において、50kW/cm以上であればよい。 By the way, in the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is 50 kW / cm 2 or more at least when the hair 91 is cut. That is, in the optical waveguide 4 having the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42, light passes through the inside of the core portion 41, so that the light intensity per unit area (1 cm 2) in the cross section of the core portion 41 is 50 kW. That is all. Here, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 does not always have to be 50 kW / cm 2 or more, and at least when cutting the hair 91 (at the time of cutting the hair 91), the power density is 50 kW / cm 2 or more. All you need is.
 本実施形態では一例として、毛91の切断時における光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、50kW/cm以上300kW/cm以下である。また、毛91の切断時における光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、毛91を切断可能な70kW/cm以上であることが好ましく、75kW/cm以上であることがより好ましい。さらに、毛91を素早く(例えば0.1秒程度で)切断可能とするならば、毛91の切断時における光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、100kW/cm以上であることがより好ましい。さらに、毛91の切断時における光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、民生品として応用可能なレーザの光出力、及びファイバ径等を考慮すると200kW/cm以下であることが好ましい。本実施形態では一例として、毛91の切断時における光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、初期値が100kW/cmであると仮定する。 In the present embodiment, as an example, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is 50 kW / cm 2 or more and 300 kW / cm 2 or less. Further, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is preferably 70 kW / cm 2 or more, and more preferably 75 kW / cm 2 or more, which can cut the hair 91. Further, if the hair 91 can be cut quickly (for example, in about 0.1 seconds), the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is more preferably 100 kW / cm 2 or more. .. Further, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is preferably 200 kW / cm 2 or less in consideration of the light output of the laser applicable as a consumer product, the fiber diameter and the like. In the present embodiment, as an example, it is assumed that the initial value of the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is 100 kW / cm 2.
 詳しくは「(2.4)使用例」の欄及び「(3)作用」の欄で説明するが、この程度のパワー密度であれば、毛切断装置1は、光放出部40から毛91に放出する光で毛91を効率的に切断しやすい。 Details will be described in the columns of "(2.4) Usage example" and "(3) Action", but with this level of power density, the hair cutting device 1 moves from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91. It is easy to cut the hair 91 efficiently with the emitted light.
 また、本実施形態では、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は可変である。すなわち、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1は、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が初期値に固定されているわけではなく、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が変更可能に構成されている。ここでは特に、毛91の切断時における光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が、初期値(100kW/cm)に固定されるのでなく、初期値から変更可能である。毛91の切断時における光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、50kW/cm以上300kW/cm以下の範囲で可変であることが好ましい。光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、連続的に変化してもよいし、段階的(非連続的)に変化してもよい。 Further, in the present embodiment, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is variable. That is, the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment is configured such that the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is not fixed to the initial value, but the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 can be changed. There is. Here, in particular, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is not fixed to the initial value (100 kW / cm 2 ), but can be changed from the initial value. The power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is preferably variable in the range of 50 kW / cm 2 or more and 300 kW / cm 2 or less. The power density of light passing through the optical waveguide 4 may be continuously changed or may be changed stepwise (discontinuously).
 また、本実施形態では、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、光源21からの出力を調整することによって、調整されている。ここでいうパワー密度の「調整」は、規定値にパワー密度を設定する態様と、上述したようにパワー密度を変化させる態様と、の両方の態様を含んでいる。要するに、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が初期値に固定される場合には、パワー密度が初期値(100kW/cm)となるように、光源21からの出力の大きさが決定される。一方、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が初期値から所望の値に変化させられる場合には、パワー密度が変化後の所望の値となるように、光源21からの出力の大きさが決定される。光源21からの出力の大きさを決定するための構成について詳しくは、「(2.6)制御回路」の欄で説明する。 Further, in the present embodiment, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is adjusted by adjusting the output from the light source 21. The "adjustment" of the power density referred to here includes both an aspect of setting the power density to a specified value and an aspect of changing the power density as described above. In short, when the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is fixed to the initial value, the magnitude of the output from the light source 21 is determined so that the power density becomes the initial value (100 kW / cm 2). .. On the other hand, when the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is changed from the initial value to a desired value, the magnitude of the output from the light source 21 is determined so that the power density becomes the desired value after the change. Will be done. The configuration for determining the magnitude of the output from the light source 21 will be described in detail in the column of “(2.6) Control circuit”.
 (2.3.3)保持部材
 次に、光放出モジュールM1の保持部材5の詳細について、図6A及び図6Bを参照して説明する。
(2.3.3) Holding member Next, the details of the holding member 5 of the light emitting module M1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6A and 6B.
 保持部材5は、光導波路4を保持する部位である。特に保持部材5は、光導波路4のコア部41の一部を露出した形態で光導波路4を保持する。つまり、光導波路4は、コア部41の一部が保持部材5によって遮光されて光の漏れが阻害されないように保持される。 The holding member 5 is a portion that holds the optical waveguide 4. In particular, the holding member 5 holds the optical waveguide 4 in a form in which a part of the core portion 41 of the optical waveguide 4 is exposed. That is, the optical waveguide 4 is held so that a part of the core portion 41 is shielded from light by the holding member 5 so that light leakage is not hindered.
 光導波路4は、保持部材5における毛切断装置1の進行方向の前方(Z軸の正の向き)を向いた面に、少なくとも光放出部40を露出させる態様で、保持部材5に保持されている。このように保持された光導波路4のコア部41は、毛91に光を放出することで毛91の切断を行う、光放出部40として機能する。 The optical waveguide 4 is held by the holding member 5 in such a manner that at least the light emitting portion 40 is exposed on the surface of the holding member 5 facing the front (positive direction of the Z axis) in the traveling direction of the hair cutting device 1. There is. The core portion 41 of the optical waveguide 4 held in this way functions as a light emitting portion 40 that cuts the hair 91 by emitting light to the hair 91.
 保持部材5は、固定ブロック32に固定されているので、光導波路4(光放出部40)は、保持部材5及び固定ブロック32を介してカバー30に間接的に固定されることになる。 Since the holding member 5 is fixed to the fixed block 32, the optical waveguide 4 (light emitting unit 40) is indirectly fixed to the cover 30 via the holding member 5 and the fixed block 32.
 ここで、光導波路4の光放出部40、保持部材5及び固定ブロック32の全てが、開口部31を通してカバー30の外部に露出している。しかも、開口部31内では、固定ブロック32及び保持部材5は、開口部31の短手方向(Z軸方向)において、毛切断装置1の進行方向の後方側(つまりZ軸の負の側)に偏って配置されている(図5A参照)。そのため、保持部材5から見て、毛切断装置1の進行方向の前方側(つまりZ軸の正の側)には、開口部31の周縁との間に隙間が確保され、この隙間を通して、開口部31内に切断対象である毛91を取り込むことが可能である。言い換えれば、保持部材5のうちの光放出部40が露出するように光導波路4が保持された面、つまり毛切断装置1の進行方向の前方(Z軸の正の向き)を向いた面と、開口部31の周縁との間には、図6Aに示すように、切断対象の毛91を導入可能である。 Here, all of the light emitting portion 40, the holding member 5, and the fixing block 32 of the optical waveguide 4 are exposed to the outside of the cover 30 through the opening 31. Moreover, in the opening 31, the fixing block 32 and the holding member 5 are on the rear side (that is, the negative side of the Z axis) of the hair cutting device 1 in the lateral direction (Z-axis direction) of the opening 31. (See FIG. 5A). Therefore, a gap is secured between the holding member 5 and the peripheral edge of the opening 31 on the front side (that is, the positive side of the Z axis) of the hair cutting device 1 in the traveling direction, and the opening is opened through this gap. It is possible to take in the hair 91 to be cut into the portion 31. In other words, a surface in which the optical waveguide 4 is held so that the light emitting portion 40 of the holding member 5 is exposed, that is, a surface facing forward in the traveling direction of the hair cutting device 1 (positive direction of the Z axis). As shown in FIG. 6A, the hair 91 to be cut can be introduced between the peripheral edge of the opening 31 and the peripheral edge of the opening 31.
 切断対象である毛91は、図6Aに示すように、保持部材5で保持された光放出部40と対向する位置に、開口部31からカバー30内に導入される。この状態では、保持部材5にて保持されている光導波路4は、光放出部40を、切断対象である毛91に突き合わせる格好になる。これにより、光導波路4は、切断対象である毛91に光放出部40を接触させることが可能である。 As shown in FIG. 6A, the hair 91 to be cut is introduced into the cover 30 from the opening 31 at a position facing the light emitting portion 40 held by the holding member 5. In this state, the optical waveguide 4 held by the holding member 5 is dressed so that the light emitting portion 40 is abutted against the hair 91 to be cut. As a result, the optical waveguide 4 can bring the light emitting unit 40 into contact with the hair 91 to be cut.
 保持部材5は、基台51と、接着部材52と、を有している。接着部材52は、基台51に対して光導波路4を接着する。基台51及び接着部材52は、いずれも光透過性を有する合成樹脂製である。特に、基台51は金型を用いて成形される樹脂成形品である。これに対して、接着部材52は、接着剤であるペースト状の樹脂が硬化した硬化物である。つまり、接着部材52は、基台51と光導波路4とを接合するための接着剤の硬化物である。 The holding member 5 has a base 51 and an adhesive member 52. The adhesive member 52 adheres the optical waveguide 4 to the base 51. The base 51 and the adhesive member 52 are both made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. In particular, the base 51 is a resin molded product that is molded using a mold. On the other hand, the adhesive member 52 is a cured product obtained by curing a paste-like resin which is an adhesive. That is, the adhesive member 52 is a cured product of an adhesive for joining the base 51 and the optical waveguide 4.
 基台51は、X軸に沿って長さを有する角柱状に形成されている。基台51は、固定ブロック32における毛切断装置1の進行方向の前方(Z軸の正の向き)を向いた面に、接着、溶着、貼り付け又は締結部材(ねじ等)を用いた結合等の適宜の手段にて、固定されている。本実施形態では、基台51の屈折率は、コア部41(光放出部40)の屈折率以上である。 The base 51 is formed in a prismatic shape having a length along the X axis. The base 51 is bonded, welded, pasted, or bonded using a fastening member (screw, etc.) to the surface of the fixed block 32 facing the front (positive direction of the Z axis) of the hair cutting device 1 in the traveling direction. It is fixed by appropriate means. In the present embodiment, the refractive index of the base 51 is equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41 (light emitting portion 40).
 また基台51は、図6Bに示すように、対向面511と、側面512と、背面513と、裏面514と、の4面を有している。基台51の長さ(X軸)に直交する断面は、これら4面を四辺とする略矩形状となる。対向面511は、毛91の切断時に皮膚92の表面921に対向する面である。側面512は、毛91の切断時に皮膚92の表面921に対して交差する面であって、対向面511と隣接する面である。背面513は、対向面511とは反対側を向いた面であって、側面512と隣接する面である。裏面514は、側面512とは反対側を向いた面であって、背面513と隣接する面である。ここでは光導波路4が、側面512に保持されている。 Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the base 51 has four surfaces, a facing surface 511, a side surface 512, a back surface 513, and a back surface 514. The cross section orthogonal to the length (X-axis) of the base 51 has a substantially rectangular shape with these four surfaces as four sides. The facing surface 511 is a surface facing the surface 921 of the skin 92 when the hair 91 is cut. The side surface 512 is a surface that intersects the surface 921 of the skin 92 when the hair 91 is cut, and is a surface adjacent to the facing surface 511. The back surface 513 is a surface facing the opposite side to the facing surface 511 and is a surface adjacent to the side surface 512. The back surface 514 is a surface facing the side opposite to the side surface 512, and is a surface adjacent to the back surface 513. Here, the optical waveguide 4 is held on the side surface 512.
 接着部材52は、基台51に対して光導波路4を接着する。本実施形態では、基台51の側面512に光導波路4が保持されるように、接着部材52は、基台51の側面512に設けられ、基台51と光導波路4との接合を行う。ここで、接着部材52は、基台51の長手方向(X軸方向)の全長にわたって配置されている。そのため、光導波路4は、基台51の長手方向の全長にわたって、接着部材52にて基台51に接着されることになる。 The adhesive member 52 adheres the optical waveguide 4 to the base 51. In the present embodiment, the adhesive member 52 is provided on the side surface 512 of the base 51 so that the optical waveguide 4 is held on the side surface 512 of the base 51, and the base 51 and the optical waveguide 4 are joined. Here, the adhesive member 52 is arranged over the entire length of the base 51 in the longitudinal direction (X-axis direction). Therefore, the optical waveguide 4 is adhered to the base 51 by the adhesive member 52 over the entire length in the longitudinal direction of the base 51.
 本実施形態では、接着部材52は、光放出部40のうち、クラッド部42と直接的に接触する。そのため、接着部材52は、その屈折率に関する制限を受けにくく、材質の選択肢が広くなる。つまり、光放出部40(コア部41)の屈折率が「1.4698」であるとすれば、接着部材52の屈折率は「1.4698」よりも大きくてもよい。光放出部40と接着部材52との間に、光放出部40の屈折率より小さいクラッド部42が介在する。そのため、たとえ接着部材52の屈折率が、光放出部40より大きくても、クラッド部42が光の漏れ量を適度に制限することができ、必要以上にコア部41から光が漏れ出すことによる光のパワー密度の低下を抑制できる。もちろん、接着部材52の屈折率は、光放出部40の屈折率と同等、又は、光放出部40の屈折率以下でもよい。 In the present embodiment, the adhesive member 52 comes into direct contact with the clad portion 42 of the light emitting portion 40. Therefore, the adhesive member 52 is less likely to be restricted in terms of its refractive index, and the choice of material is widened. That is, if the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 (core portion 41) is "1.4698", the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 may be larger than "1.4698". A clad portion 42 having a refractive index smaller than that of the light emitting portion 40 is interposed between the light emitting portion 40 and the adhesive member 52. Therefore, even if the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 is larger than that of the light emitting portion 40, the clad portion 42 can appropriately limit the amount of light leakage, and the light leaks from the core portion 41 more than necessary. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the power density of light. Of course, the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 may be equal to or lower than the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40.
 また基台51のうち、光導波路4が保持される側面512に、光導波路4の位置決めを行う位置決め部53(溝)が形成されている。位置決め部53は、基台51の長手方向(X軸方向)の全長にわたって形成されている。光導波路4は、クラッド部42が、位置決め部53としての溝内に収容されるようにして、基台51の側面512に保持される。 Further, in the base 51, a positioning portion 53 (groove) for positioning the optical waveguide 4 is formed on the side surface 512 where the optical waveguide 4 is held. The positioning portion 53 is formed over the entire length of the base 51 in the longitudinal direction (X-axis direction). The optical waveguide 4 is held on the side surface 512 of the base 51 so that the clad portion 42 is accommodated in the groove as the positioning portion 53.
 毛切断部材3は、光導波路4の周囲にあり、毛91の切断時に皮膚92に接触する接触面(モジュール側接触面501、及びカバー側接触面301:図5A参照)を有している。光導波路4は、モジュール側接触面501からの高さL0(図6B参照)が100μm以下となるように、保持部材5に保持されている。ここではモジュール側接触面501は、基台51の対向面511、及び、固定ブロック32におけるY軸の負の向きを向いた面に相当する。カバー側接触面301は、カバー30におけるY軸の負の向きを向いた面に相当する。本実施形態では、光導波路4は、カバー側接触面301からの高さも、モジュール側接触面501からの高さと略同じである。 The hair cutting member 3 is located around the optical waveguide 4 and has a contact surface (module side contact surface 501 and cover side contact surface 301: see FIG. 5A) that comes into contact with the skin 92 when the hair 91 is cut. The optical waveguide 4 is held by the holding member 5 so that the height L0 (see FIG. 6B) from the module-side contact surface 501 is 100 μm or less. Here, the module-side contact surface 501 corresponds to the facing surface 511 of the base 51 and the surface of the fixed block 32 facing the negative direction of the Y-axis. The cover-side contact surface 301 corresponds to the surface of the cover 30 facing the negative direction of the Y-axis. In the present embodiment, the height of the optical waveguide 4 from the cover-side contact surface 301 is substantially the same as the height from the module-side contact surface 501.
 このような接触面(501,301)からの光導波路4の高さL0は、毛91の切断時における皮膚92の表面921からの光導波路4の高さに等しい。すなわち、本実施形態では、高さL0が、100μm以下に設定されることで、毛91の切断時における皮膚92の表面921から光導波路4までの距離(高さ)は100μm以下となる。ただし、ここでは高さL0は1μm以上であり、ゼロ(0)ではない。そのため、毛91の切断時において、皮膚92の表面921から光導波路4を離すことができる。したがって、例えば、皮膚92の表面921にニキビ等の隆起物があっても、隆起物による光導波路4の引っ掛かりが生じにくい。 The height L0 of the optical waveguide 4 from such a contact surface (501,301) is equal to the height of the optical waveguide 4 from the surface 921 of the skin 92 at the time of cutting the hair 91. That is, in the present embodiment, by setting the height L0 to 100 μm or less, the distance (height) from the surface 921 of the skin 92 to the optical waveguide 4 at the time of cutting the hair 91 is 100 μm or less. However, here, the height L0 is 1 μm or more, not zero (0). Therefore, the optical waveguide 4 can be separated from the surface 921 of the skin 92 when the hair 91 is cut. Therefore, for example, even if there is a raised object such as acne on the surface 921 of the skin 92, the optical waveguide 4 is unlikely to be caught by the raised object.
 (2.3.4)カバーと固定キャップ
 カバー30は、上述の通り、合成樹脂製であり、全体としてX軸に沿って長尺の角柱状に形成されている。カバー30は、中空であり、開口部31を有している。カバー30は、その内部に、開口部31を介して、光導波路4の光放出部40を露出する形態で、光放出モジュールM1を収容している。ここでは、カバー30は、光放出モジュールM1全体を収容しているのではなく、光放出モジュールM1のうち、ホルダ部H1よりもX軸の正の向きに突出した部位を収容している。光放出モジュールM1の固定ブロック32は、カバー30に固定されている。
(2.3.4) Cover and Fixed Cap The cover 30 is made of synthetic resin as described above, and is formed as a long prismatic shape along the X axis as a whole. The cover 30 is hollow and has an opening 31. The cover 30 houses the light emission module M1 in a form in which the light emission unit 40 of the optical waveguide 4 is exposed through the opening 31. Here, the cover 30 does not accommodate the entire light emitting module M1, but accommodates a portion of the light emitting module M1 that protrudes in the positive direction of the X-axis from the holder portion H1. The fixing block 32 of the light emitting module M1 is fixed to the cover 30.
 カバー30は、X軸の負の向きにおける一端面に挿入口300(図3参照)を有している。光放出モジュールM1は、カバー30の挿入口300から挿入されて収容される。またカバー30は、挿入口300の周縁において、フランジ部320を有している。 The cover 30 has an insertion port 300 (see FIG. 3) on one end surface in the negative direction of the X axis. The light emission module M1 is inserted and accommodated from the insertion port 300 of the cover 30. Further, the cover 30 has a flange portion 320 at the peripheral edge of the insertion port 300.
 固定キャップ34は、例えば金属製であるが、特に限定されず、合成樹脂製でもよい。固定キャップ34は、X軸に沿った軸を有する筒状である。固定キャップ34は、X軸の負の向きを向いた一端面が開放され、当該一端面とは反対側の端面(X軸の正の向きを向いた面)に、カバー30を挿通可能な孔部340(図1参照)を有している。固定キャップ34は、その内周面に、レセプタクル部81にあるねじ部810(ねじ山)が螺合可能なねじ溝341を有している。 The fixing cap 34 is made of metal, for example, but is not particularly limited and may be made of synthetic resin. The fixing cap 34 has a cylindrical shape having an axis along the X axis. In the fixing cap 34, one end surface facing the negative direction of the X axis is opened, and a hole through which the cover 30 can be inserted in the end surface opposite to the one end surface (the surface facing the positive direction of the X axis). It has a portion 340 (see FIG. 1). The fixing cap 34 has a threaded groove 341 on its inner peripheral surface to which a threaded portion 810 (thread) in the receptacle portion 81 can be screwed.
 カバー30は、フランジ部320を介して、ホルダ部H1と固定される。ここでは、ホルダ部H1内の固定部材F1がフランジ部320に接着することで、カバー30は、光放出モジュールM1を収容した形態で、ホルダ部H1に固定される。 The cover 30 is fixed to the holder portion H1 via the flange portion 320. Here, the fixing member F1 in the holder portion H1 is adhered to the flange portion 320, so that the cover 30 is fixed to the holder portion H1 in the form of accommodating the light emission module M1.
 固定キャップ34は、孔部340にカバー30を通すように、X軸の負の向きに移動させてカバー30に被せられ、さらにホルダ部H1の、周方向における全体を概ね覆うように配置される。固定キャップ34は、孔部340の内周部がカバー30のフランジ部320に接触して、更なるX軸の負の向きへの移動が規制される。固定キャップ34は、図3に示す状態において、カバー30及びホルダ部H1に対して回転可能である。 The fixing cap 34 is moved in the negative direction of the X-axis so as to pass the cover 30 through the hole portion 340 and is covered with the cover 30, and is further arranged so as to substantially cover the entire holder portion H1 in the circumferential direction. .. In the fixing cap 34, the inner peripheral portion of the hole portion 340 comes into contact with the flange portion 320 of the cover 30, and further movement of the X-axis in the negative direction is restricted. The fixing cap 34 is rotatable with respect to the cover 30 and the holder portion H1 in the state shown in FIG.
 本実施形態では、固定キャップ34が、レセプタクル部81からのフェルール71の抜けを規制する規制構造(ここではねじ溝341)を有している。固定キャップ34のねじ溝341に、装置本体2のレセプタクル部81にあるねじ部810が螺合されることで、レセプタクル部81からのフェルール71の抜けが規制される。したがって、意図せずにフェルール71が抜けることを抑制しやすい。結果的に、フェルール71を含む毛切断部材3の全体が、装置本体2から脱落しにくくなる。 In the present embodiment, the fixing cap 34 has a regulation structure (here, screw groove 341) that regulates the removal of the ferrule 71 from the receptacle portion 81. By screwing the screw portion 810 in the receptacle portion 81 of the apparatus main body 2 into the screw groove 341 of the fixing cap 34, the removal of the ferrule 71 from the receptacle portion 81 is restricted. Therefore, it is easy to prevent the ferrule 71 from being unintentionally removed. As a result, the entire hair cutting member 3 including the ferrule 71 is less likely to fall off from the apparatus main body 2.
 (2.3.5)フェルール
 フェルール71は、光導波路4の受光面40A側の端部を保持する形態で光放出モジュールM1と一体的に結合され、かつ光導波路4に導入される光に対するコア部41の位置を一意に決める接続部材である。フェルール71は、レセプタクル部81に対して機械的に接続可能である。フェルール71がレセプタクル部81に対して接続されることで、コア部41には、レセプタクル部81の側から光が導入される。
(2.3.5) Ferrule The ferrule 71 is integrally coupled with the light emitting module M1 in a form of holding the end portion of the optical waveguide 4 on the light receiving surface 40A side, and is a core for light introduced into the optical waveguide 4. It is a connecting member that uniquely determines the position of the portion 41. The ferrule 71 can be mechanically connected to the receptacle section 81. By connecting the ferrule 71 to the receptacle section 81, light is introduced into the core section 41 from the side of the receptacle section 81.
 フェルール71は、例えば、X軸に沿って長尺な円筒状の部材であり、X軸方向における両端面が開放されている。フェルール71は、例えば、ジルコニア等のセラミック焼結体によって形成されている。フェルール71は、X軸に沿って見て、円環状である。フェルール71の外径は、例えば、2.5mmであるが、この数値に限定されない。 The ferrule 71 is, for example, a long cylindrical member along the X-axis, and both end faces in the X-axis direction are open. The ferrule 71 is formed of, for example, a ceramic sintered body such as zirconia. The ferrule 71 is annular when viewed along the X axis. The outer diameter of the ferrule 71 is, for example, 2.5 mm, but is not limited to this value.
 フェルール71は、光導波路4の受光面40A側の端部に装着される。フェルール71の内径は、光導波路4の外径よりも大きく、フェルール71は、接着部材G1を介して、光放出モジュールM1と一体的に結合される。 The ferrule 71 is attached to the end of the optical waveguide 4 on the light receiving surface 40A side. The inner diameter of the ferrule 71 is larger than the outer diameter of the optical waveguide 4, and the ferrule 71 is integrally coupled with the light emission module M1 via the adhesive member G1.
 接着部材G1は、光導波路4及びフェルール71を接着する。接着部材G1は、接着剤であるペースト状の樹脂が硬化した硬化物である。つまり、接着部材G1は、フェルール71の内周面と、光導波路4の外周面とを接合するための接着剤の硬化物である。クラッド部42は、その外周面の一部が、フェルール71の内周面と接触するように配置される。接着部材G1の屈折率は、コア部41の屈折率よりも小さい。そのため、コア部41から接着部材G1への必要以上の光の漏れを抑制しやすい。 The adhesive member G1 adheres the optical waveguide 4 and the ferrule 71. The adhesive member G1 is a cured product obtained by curing a paste-like resin which is an adhesive. That is, the adhesive member G1 is a cured product of an adhesive for joining the inner peripheral surface of the ferrule 71 and the outer peripheral surface of the optical waveguide 4. The clad portion 42 is arranged so that a part of its outer peripheral surface is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the ferrule 71. The refractive index of the adhesive member G1 is smaller than the refractive index of the core portion 41. Therefore, it is easy to suppress unnecessary light leakage from the core portion 41 to the adhesive member G1.
 次に、フェルール71の結合先となる装置本体2のレセプタクル部81について図3及び図4を参照して説明する。レセプタクル部81は、例えば、樹脂製の部位であり、ここでは装置本体2のケース20と一体となって形成されている。ただし、レセプタクル部81は、金属製の部位でもよい。またレセプタクル部81は、ケース20と別体であって、ケース20に対して、接着、溶着、貼り付け又は締結部材(ねじ等)を用いた結合等の適宜の手段にて、固定されてもよい。 Next, the receptacle portion 81 of the apparatus main body 2 to which the ferrule 71 is connected will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. The receptacle portion 81 is, for example, a resin portion, and is formed integrally with the case 20 of the apparatus main body 2 here. However, the receptacle portion 81 may be a metal portion. Further, the receptacle portion 81 is a separate body from the case 20, and may be fixed to the case 20 by an appropriate means such as adhesion, welding, pasting, or bonding using a fastening member (screw or the like). good.
 レセプタクル部81は、全体として略円筒形状である。レセプタクル部81は、図3に示すように、第1部位801と、第2部位802とから構成される。第1部位801は、ケース20のX軸の正の側の一端部と連続する部位である。第2部位802は、第1部位801よりもその外径が小さい部位であり、第1部位801のX軸の正の側の端部と連続する部位である。 The receptacle portion 81 has a substantially cylindrical shape as a whole. As shown in FIG. 3, the receptacle portion 81 is composed of a first portion 801 and a second portion 802. The first portion 801 is a portion continuous with one end on the positive side of the X-axis of the case 20. The second part 802 is a part having an outer diameter smaller than that of the first part 801 and is a part continuous with the positive end of the X-axis of the first part 801.
 レセプタクル部81は、その軸方向に沿って円形状に貫通した貫通孔811を有している。貫通孔811は、ケース20における光源21及び光学系22等を収容している収容空間と連通している。ただし、レセプタクル部81における、貫通孔811の奥にある開口を塞ぐように、光学系22の第4レンズ224が配置される。言い換えると、フェルール71がレセプタクル部81に接続されていない状態では、光学系22の第4レンズ224の一面は、貫通孔811を介して、外部に露出する。 The receptacle portion 81 has a through hole 811 penetrating in a circular shape along the axial direction thereof. The through hole 811 communicates with the accommodating space accommodating the light source 21 and the optical system 22 in the case 20. However, the fourth lens 224 of the optical system 22 is arranged so as to close the opening at the back of the through hole 811 in the receptacle portion 81. In other words, when the ferrule 71 is not connected to the receptacle portion 81, one surface of the fourth lens 224 of the optical system 22 is exposed to the outside through the through hole 811.
 貫通孔811は、図3に示すように、円形状の小径孔812と、小径孔812の内径よりも大きい内径を有した円形状の大径孔813とを含む。小径孔812の内径は、フェルール71が小径孔812内にほぼ隙間なく収まる程度に、フェルール71の外径と略同一に設定されている。大径孔813の内径は、ホルダ部H1が大径孔813内に収まる程度に、ホルダ部H1の外径と略同一に設定されている。なお、小径孔812の内径は、小径孔812に隣接して配置されている第4レンズ224の外径よりも小さい。 As shown in FIG. 3, the through hole 811 includes a circular small diameter hole 812 and a circular large diameter hole 813 having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the small diameter hole 812. The inner diameter of the small diameter hole 812 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the ferrule 71 so that the ferrule 71 fits in the small diameter hole 812 with almost no gap. The inner diameter of the large-diameter hole 813 is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the holder portion H1 so that the holder portion H1 fits within the large-diameter hole 813. The inner diameter of the small diameter hole 812 is smaller than the outer diameter of the fourth lens 224 arranged adjacent to the small diameter hole 812.
 フェルール71がレセプタクル部81に接続された状態で、ホルダ部H1が小径孔812の開口の周縁部815(図3参照)に接触する。結果的に、フェルール71が、更に奥へ進入してしまうことが抑制される。 With the ferrule 71 connected to the receptacle portion 81, the holder portion H1 contacts the peripheral edge portion 815 (see FIG. 3) of the opening of the small diameter hole 812. As a result, the ferrule 71 is prevented from entering further.
 ここでは、ホルダ部H1が周縁部815(図3参照)に接触した状態で、光導波路4の受光面40Aが、第4レンズ224の一面と僅かに隙間を空けて近接して対向した状態に配置される。特に、フェルール71によって位置が一意に決められたコア部41の光軸が、光源21及び光学系22の光軸CX1(図2参照)と一致することになる。 Here, in a state where the holder portion H1 is in contact with the peripheral portion 815 (see FIG. 3), the light receiving surface 40A of the optical waveguide 4 is in a state of facing each other in close proximity to one surface of the fourth lens 224 with a slight gap. Be placed. In particular, the optical axis of the core portion 41 whose position is uniquely determined by the ferrule 71 coincides with the optical axis CX1 (see FIG. 2) of the light source 21 and the optical system 22.
 ここで、第2部位802の外周面にあるねじ部810(ねじ山)(図3参照)が、固定キャップ34のねじ溝341に螺合可能である。 Here, the threaded portion 810 (thread) (see FIG. 3) on the outer peripheral surface of the second portion 802 can be screwed into the threaded groove 341 of the fixing cap 34.
 また第2部位802は、その外周面におけるY軸の正を向く領域に、スリット状の溝部814を有している。溝部814は、第2部位802の上記領域を貫通している。溝部814は、大径孔813と連通している。溝部814は、X軸方向における第2部位802の両端部にわたって形成されている。溝部814は、ホルダ部H1の凸部H11が挿入可能となっている。ホルダ部H1が周縁部815(図3参照)に接触した状態で、凸部H11は、溝部814のX軸方向における奥まで進入した位置となる。 Further, the second portion 802 has a slit-shaped groove portion 814 in the region of the outer peripheral surface thereof facing the positive axis of the Y axis. The groove portion 814 penetrates the above-mentioned region of the second portion 802. The groove portion 814 communicates with the large diameter hole 813. The groove portion 814 is formed over both ends of the second portion 802 in the X-axis direction. In the groove portion 814, the convex portion H11 of the holder portion H1 can be inserted. In a state where the holder portion H1 is in contact with the peripheral portion 815 (see FIG. 3), the convex portion H11 is at a position where the groove portion 814 has entered deep in the X-axis direction.
 (2.3.6)ホルダ部
 ホルダ部H1は、光放出モジュールM1の一部、及びフェルール71の一部が挿入されてこれらを互いに一体的に結合する部位である。
(2.3.6) Holder part The holder part H1 is a part where a part of the light emitting module M1 and a part of the ferrule 71 are inserted and integrally bonded to each other.
 ホルダ部H1は、例えば、X軸に沿って長尺な円筒状の部材であり、X軸方向における両端面が開放されている。ホルダ部H1は、例えば、金属製(又は合成樹脂製でもよい)の部位である。ホルダ部H1は、X軸に沿って見て円環状である。 The holder portion H1 is, for example, a long cylindrical member along the X-axis, and both end faces in the X-axis direction are open. The holder portion H1 is, for example, a portion made of metal (or may be made of synthetic resin). The holder portion H1 is annular when viewed along the X axis.
 ホルダ部H1の内径は、光放出モジュールM1の外径よりも大きい。またホルダ部H1の内径は、フェルール71の外径よりも大きい。ホルダ部H1は、その外周面において、Y軸の正の向きに突出した凸部H11(図4参照)を有している。凸部H11は、溝部814内をX軸の負の向きに挿入されることで、レセプタクル部81に対する、毛切断部材3の軸周りの方向における毛切断部材3の位置を一意に決める。ここでは一例として、凸部H11は、円柱状に形成されているが、その形状は、特に限定されない。 The inner diameter of the holder portion H1 is larger than the outer diameter of the light emission module M1. Further, the inner diameter of the holder portion H1 is larger than the outer diameter of the ferrule 71. The holder portion H1 has a convex portion H11 (see FIG. 4) protruding in the positive direction of the Y-axis on the outer peripheral surface thereof. The convex portion H11 is inserted into the groove portion 814 in the negative direction of the X-axis to uniquely determine the position of the hair cutting member 3 in the direction around the axis of the hair cutting member 3 with respect to the receptacle portion 81. Here, as an example, the convex portion H11 is formed in a columnar shape, but the shape thereof is not particularly limited.
 また本実施形態では、光放出モジュールM1のX軸の負の側の一端部が、ホルダ部H1におけるX軸の正の側の開口から奥へ進入した状態で、固定部材F1を介して固定される。またフェルール71のX軸の正の側の一端部は、光導波路4の受光面40A側の端部がフェルール71に装着された状態で、かつ、ホルダ部H1におけるX軸の負の側の開口から奥に進入した状態で、固定部材F1を介して固定される。ここでは固定部材F1の屈折率は、コア部41の屈折率よりも小さい。そのため、コア部41から固定部材F1への必要以上の光の漏れを抑制しやすい。 Further, in the present embodiment, one end of the light emitting module M1 on the negative side of the X-axis is fixed via the fixing member F1 in a state where the one end portion on the positive side of the X-axis in the holder portion H1 has entered the interior from the opening on the positive side of the X-axis. Ru. Further, one end on the positive side of the X-axis of the ferrule 71 is an opening on the negative side of the X-axis in the holder portion H1 with the end on the light receiving surface 40A side of the optical waveguide 4 mounted on the ferrule 71. It is fixed via the fixing member F1 in a state of entering the back from the center. Here, the refractive index of the fixing member F1 is smaller than the refractive index of the core portion 41. Therefore, it is easy to suppress the leakage of light from the core portion 41 to the fixing member F1 more than necessary.
 固定部材F1は、例えば、接着剤であるペースト状の樹脂が硬化した硬化物である。固定部材F1は、フェルール71内の接着部材G1と同じ種類の接着剤でもよいし、異なる種類の接着剤でもよい。固定部材F1は、光放出モジュールM1の一部と、フェルール71の一部とを接着する。固定部材F1は、光放出モジュールM1の中心軸とフェルール71の中心軸とをホルダ部H1の中心軸に一致させ、かつ、光導波路4の第2領域402が湾曲した状態で、固定する。なお、光導波路4の第2領域402の曲率はできるだけ小さいことが望ましく、それによって第2領域402における光の漏れを抑制できる。 The fixing member F1 is, for example, a cured product obtained by curing a paste-like resin which is an adhesive. The fixing member F1 may be the same type of adhesive as the adhesive member G1 in the ferrule 71, or may be a different type of adhesive. The fixing member F1 adheres a part of the light emitting module M1 and a part of the ferrule 71. The fixing member F1 is fixed in a state where the central axis of the light emission module M1 and the central axis of the ferrule 71 are aligned with the central axis of the holder portion H1 and the second region 402 of the optical waveguide 4 is curved. It is desirable that the curvature of the second region 402 of the optical waveguide 4 is as small as possible, whereby light leakage in the second region 402 can be suppressed.
 ところで、センサ部S1(S11,S12)及び検知部D1からそれぞれ導出されている複数の第1接続線101(図2及び図9参照)は、ホルダ部H1の内部を通るように配置される。複数の第1接続線101は、固定部材F1を介してホルダ部H1内で保持されながら、各第1接続線101の先端にある導体部101A(図9参照:例えば接続ピン)が、ホルダ部H1のX軸の負の側の一端部から露出されている。 By the way, a plurality of first connection lines 101 (see FIGS. 2 and 9) derived from the sensor units S1 (S11, S12) and the detection unit D1 are arranged so as to pass through the inside of the holder unit H1. While the plurality of first connecting lines 101 are held in the holder portion H1 via the fixing member F1, the conductor portion 101A (see FIG. 9: for example, a connecting pin) at the tip of each first connecting line 101 is held in the holder portion. It is exposed from one end on the negative side of the X-axis of H1.
 一方、レセプタクル部81には、制御回路6と電気的に接続されている複数の第2接続線102(図2及び図9参照)が埋め込まれている。各第2接続線102の先端にある導体部102A(図9参照:例えばピン受け部)が、レセプタクル部81のX軸の正の側の一端部(周縁部815)から露出されている。凸部H11が溝部814内をX軸の負の向きに奥まで挿入されることで、ホルダ部H1から露出する各第1接続線101の導体部101Aが、対応する第2接続線102の導体部102Aと接続される。要するに、毛切断部材3が装置本体2に取り付けられることで、光導波路4が光学系22を介して光源21と光学的に結合されるだけでなく、センサ部S1及び検知部D1が、接続線(101,102)を介して制御回路6と電気的に接続されることになる。 On the other hand, a plurality of second connection lines 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 9) electrically connected to the control circuit 6 are embedded in the receptacle section 81. The conductor portion 102A (see FIG. 9, for example, the pin receiving portion) at the tip of each second connecting line 102 is exposed from one end (peripheral portion 815) on the positive side of the X-axis of the receptacle portion 81. When the convex portion H11 is inserted all the way into the groove portion 814 in the negative direction of the X axis, the conductor portion 101A of each first connecting line 101 exposed from the holder portion H1 becomes the conductor of the corresponding second connecting line 102. It is connected to the unit 102A. In short, by attaching the hair cutting member 3 to the device main body 2, not only the optical waveguide 4 is optically coupled to the light source 21 via the optical system 22, but also the sensor unit S1 and the detection unit D1 are connected to each other. It will be electrically connected to the control circuit 6 via (101, 102).
 (2.3.7)センサ部
 センサ部S1(図1、図5A、図5B、及び図9参照)は、皮膚92の接触状態を検知するための部位である。センサ部S1は、光導波路4の周囲の領域に配置される。毛切断装置1は、センサ部S1を2つ備えている。2つのセンサ部S1は、カバー30に固定されている。2つのセンサ部S1は、カバー30の幅方向W1(図5B参照)における両側にそれぞれ配置される。幅方向W1は、Z軸に平行である。センサ部S1の数は、特に限定されない。センサ部S1の数は、1つでもよいし、3つ以上でもよい。
(2.3.7) Sensor unit The sensor unit S1 (see FIGS. 1, 5A, 5B, and 9) is a portion for detecting the contact state of the skin 92. The sensor unit S1 is arranged in a region around the optical waveguide 4. The hair cutting device 1 includes two sensor units S1. The two sensor units S1 are fixed to the cover 30. The two sensor units S1 are arranged on both sides of the cover 30 in the width direction W1 (see FIG. 5B). The width direction W1 is parallel to the Z axis. The number of sensor units S1 is not particularly limited. The number of the sensor units S1 may be one or three or more.
 2つのセンサ部S1は、図1に示すように、Z軸の方向において、カバー30の開口部31を間に挟み込むように配置されている。以下、開口部31よりもZ軸の正の側のセンサ部S1を「第1センサ部S11」と呼び、開口部31よりもZ軸の負の側のセンサ部S1を「第2センサ部S12」と呼ぶことがある。 As shown in FIG. 1, the two sensor units S1 are arranged so as to sandwich the opening 31 of the cover 30 in the direction of the Z axis. Hereinafter, the sensor unit S1 on the positive side of the Z axis from the opening 31 is referred to as a “first sensor unit S11”, and the sensor unit S1 on the negative side of the Z axis from the opening 31 is referred to as a “second sensor unit S12”. May be called.
 各センサ部S1は、例えば、静電容量式のタッチセンサ(タッチスイッチ)を構成する。各センサ部S1は、感度を高めることで物体の近接を検出する静電容量式の近接センサでもよく、この場合、センサ部S1は、皮膚92の近接状態を検知するための部位となり得る。また各センサ部S1は、静電容量式のセンサに限定されず、光学式のセンサ、誘導式のセンサ、又は磁気式のセンサ等でもよい。 Each sensor unit S1 constitutes, for example, a capacitive touch sensor (touch switch). Each sensor unit S1 may be a capacitive proximity sensor that detects the proximity of an object by increasing the sensitivity, and in this case, the sensor unit S1 can be a portion for detecting the proximity state of the skin 92. Further, each sensor unit S1 is not limited to the capacitance type sensor, and may be an optical type sensor, an inductive type sensor, a magnetic type sensor, or the like.
 各センサ部S1は、単一の電極S2(導電体部)を有し、電極S2と接触体(皮膚92)との間における静電容量の変化を検知する、自己容量式のセンサである。また各センサ部S1は、例えば保護カバーS3を更に有している。各保護カバーS3は、対応する電極S2の表面を覆うように配置される。各保護カバーS3は、例えば電気絶縁性を有する樹脂材料により形成される。センサ部S1の検知方式によっては、保護カバーS3は省略されてもよい。 Each sensor unit S1 is a self-capacitance type sensor that has a single electrode S2 (conductor unit) and detects a change in capacitance between the electrode S2 and the contact body (skin 92). Further, each sensor unit S1 further has, for example, a protective cover S3. Each protective cover S3 is arranged so as to cover the surface of the corresponding electrode S2. Each protective cover S3 is formed of, for example, a resin material having electrical insulation. The protective cover S3 may be omitted depending on the detection method of the sensor unit S1.
 各センサ部S1は、例えば、インサート成形等によってカバー30に埋め込むように固定されている。各センサ部S1は、概ねその表面(接触面S10)が、カバー30の表面(Y軸の負の側の一面)から露出する。接触面S10は、保護カバーS3の表面(Y軸の負の側の一面)に相当する。接触面S10は、カバー30の表面と概ね面一である。ここでは一例として、接触面S10とカバー30の表面(Y軸の負の側の一面)とによって、カバー側接触面301が構成されるものとする。 Each sensor unit S1 is fixed so as to be embedded in the cover 30 by, for example, insert molding or the like. The surface of each sensor unit S1 (contact surface S10) is generally exposed from the surface of the cover 30 (one surface on the negative side of the Y axis). The contact surface S10 corresponds to the surface of the protective cover S3 (one surface on the negative side of the Y axis). The contact surface S10 is substantially flush with the surface of the cover 30. Here, as an example, it is assumed that the cover-side contact surface 301 is formed by the contact surface S10 and the surface of the cover 30 (one surface on the negative side of the Y-axis).
 各電極S2は、複数の第1接続線101のうちのセンサ部S1用の線と電気的に接続されている。毛切断部材3が装置本体2に取り付けられることで、各電極S2は、接続線(101,102)を介して制御回路6と電気的に接続されることになる。 Each electrode S2 is electrically connected to the wire for the sensor unit S1 among the plurality of first connection wires 101. By attaching the hair cutting member 3 to the apparatus main body 2, each electrode S2 is electrically connected to the control circuit 6 via a connecting line (101, 102).
 皮膚92が、各センサ部S1の接触面S10に接触することで、電極S2と人体とによって構成される(擬似的な)コンデンサの静電容量の変化を含む電気信号が、接続線(101,102)を介して制御回路6に出力される。制御回路6は、各センサ部S1から受信する電気信号(検知信号)に応じて、接触面S10に皮膚92が接触したこと、又は接触面S10から皮膚92が離れたことを判断する。 When the skin 92 comes into contact with the contact surface S10 of each sensor unit S1, an electric signal including a change in the capacitance of the (pseudo) capacitor composed of the electrode S2 and the human body is transmitted to the connection line (101, It is output to the control circuit 6 via 102). The control circuit 6 determines that the skin 92 has come into contact with the contact surface S10 or the skin 92 has been separated from the contact surface S10 according to the electric signal (detection signal) received from each sensor unit S1.
 (2.3.8)検知部及び検知領域
 検知領域D2は、図5Bに示すように、光導波路4内を伝達する光に起因した対象光OB1が通る領域である。検知領域D2は、カバー30の内部の、X軸の正の側の隅に配置された空間領域である。対象光OB1は、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に向かう光のうちの一部の光である。
(2.3.8) Detection unit and detection area As shown in FIG. 5B, the detection area D2 is a region through which the target light OB1 caused by the light transmitted in the optical waveguide 4 passes. The detection area D2 is a spatial area arranged in the positive side corner of the X-axis inside the cover 30. The target light OB1 is a part of the light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and heading toward the detection region D2.
 ここで本実施形態の毛切断装置1は、図5Bに示すように、拡散部Y1を更に備えている。拡散部Y1は、検知領域D2内に配置され、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に進入した光を拡散反射させる。そして、ここでは対象光OB1は、拡散部Y1で拡散された拡散光を含む。言い換えると、光導波路4内を伝達する光が一次光とすれば、対象光OB1は二次光である。拡散部Y1は、カバー30に対して適宜の固定手段で固定されている。 Here, the hair cutting device 1 of the present embodiment further includes a diffusion unit Y1 as shown in FIG. 5B. The diffusion unit Y1 is arranged in the detection region D2, transmits the light in the optical waveguide 4, and diffuses and reflects the light that has entered the detection region D2. And here, the target light OB1 includes the diffused light diffused by the diffusing part Y1. In other words, if the light transmitted in the optical waveguide 4 is the primary light, the target light OB1 is the secondary light. The diffusion portion Y1 is fixed to the cover 30 by an appropriate fixing means.
 拡散部Y1は、光(入射光)を様々な方向へ乱反射させる反射面Y10(図5B参照)を有した部材から構成される。拡散部Y1は、図5Bの例では、その厚み方向がX軸に平行となるように配置された板状の部材から構成されるが、拡散部Y1の形状は特に限定されない。反射面Y10は、拡散部Y1の母材の表面に例えば微細な凹凸構造を設けることで形成され得る。反射面Y10の形成方法は特に限定されない。 The diffusion unit Y1 is composed of a member having a reflecting surface Y10 (see FIG. 5B) that diffusely reflects light (incident light) in various directions. In the example of FIG. 5B, the diffusion portion Y1 is composed of plate-shaped members arranged so that the thickness direction thereof is parallel to the X axis, but the shape of the diffusion portion Y1 is not particularly limited. The reflective surface Y10 can be formed by, for example, providing a fine uneven structure on the surface of the base material of the diffusion portion Y1. The method of forming the reflective surface Y10 is not particularly limited.
 光放出モジュールM1におけるX軸の正の側の先端部、具体的には、光導波路4の先端部の終端面40Bは、図5Bに示すように、検知領域D2内の拡散部Y1の反射面Y10と対向するように配置される。つまり、光導波路4内を伝達方向A2に沿って伝達する光のうち、毛91を切断するために光放出部40から漏れ出た光以外の光が、終端面40Bから導出される。したがって、光導波路4内を伝達して終端面40Bから導出された直接的な光が反射面Y10に入射する。光導波路4の光軸C1は、反射面Y10と直交する。 As shown in FIG. 5B, the end surface 40B of the tip of the light emission module M1 on the positive side of the X-axis, specifically, the tip of the optical waveguide 4, is the reflection surface of the diffusion portion Y1 in the detection region D2. It is arranged so as to face Y10. That is, among the light transmitted along the transmission direction A2 in the optical waveguide 4, light other than the light leaked from the light emitting unit 40 for cutting the hair 91 is derived from the end surface 40B. Therefore, the direct light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and derived from the end surface 40B is incident on the reflection surface Y10. The optical axis C1 of the optical waveguide 4 is orthogonal to the reflection surface Y10.
 検知領域D2は、収容空間SP1と連通している。検知領域D2と収容空間SP1との間には仕切り壁があってもよい。仕切り壁が設けられている場合、仕切り壁には、光導波路4を通す孔部が設けられていることが好ましい。 The detection area D2 communicates with the accommodation space SP1. There may be a partition wall between the detection area D2 and the accommodation space SP1. When a partition wall is provided, it is preferable that the partition wall is provided with a hole through which the optical waveguide 4 passes.
 検知部D1は、図5Bに示すように、検知領域D2内の対象光OB1(ここでは拡散部Y1による拡散光)を検知する。検知部D1は、検知領域D2に配置される。 As shown in FIG. 5B, the detection unit D1 detects the target light OB1 (here, the diffused light by the diffuser unit Y1) in the detection area D2. The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2.
 検知部D1は、半導体素子として、例えばフォトダイオード等の受光素子を有している。検知部D1は、複数のフォトダイオードから構成されるフォトダイオードアレイを有してもよい。 The detection unit D1 has a light receiving element such as a photodiode as a semiconductor element. The detection unit D1 may have a photodiode array composed of a plurality of photodiodes.
 検知部D1は、対象光OB1を受光可能な位置に配置される。検知部D1は、例えば集光レンズからなる受光面D10を有している。受光面D10は、拡散部Y1の反射面Y10の側を向くように配置されている。 The detection unit D1 is arranged at a position where the target light OB1 can be received. The detection unit D1 has a light receiving surface D10 made of, for example, a condenser lens. The light receiving surface D10 is arranged so as to face the reflecting surface Y10 of the diffusing portion Y1.
 検知部D1は、反射面Y10よりもX軸の負の側に配置される。具体的には、検知部D1は、X軸の方向において、反射面Y10と終端面40Bとの間に配置される。ここでは一例として、検知部D1は、光導波路4よりもZ軸の負の側に配置される。ただし、検知部D1は、対象光OB1を受光出来て、かつ、終端面40Bから導出されて反射面Y10に入射する光を遮らないように配置されていれば、その配置場所は、特に限定されない。また図示例では、検知部D1は、模式的に矩形状に形成されているが、形状も特に限定されない。 The detection unit D1 is arranged on the negative side of the X-axis with respect to the reflection surface Y10. Specifically, the detection unit D1 is arranged between the reflection surface Y10 and the end surface 40B in the direction of the X axis. Here, as an example, the detection unit D1 is arranged on the negative side of the Z axis with respect to the optical waveguide 4. However, the location of the detection unit D1 is not particularly limited as long as it can receive the target light OB1 and is arranged so as not to block the light derived from the end surface 40B and incident on the reflection surface Y10. .. Further, in the illustrated example, the detection unit D1 is schematically formed in a rectangular shape, but the shape is not particularly limited.
 また図5Bでは図示を省略しているが、検知部D1は、実装基板に実装されて、その実装基板が、カバー30に対して適宜の固定手段によって固定されていることが望ましい。 Although not shown in FIG. 5B, it is desirable that the detection unit D1 is mounted on a mounting board, and the mounting board is fixed to the cover 30 by an appropriate fixing means.
 検知部D1の受光素子は、複数の第1接続線101のうちの検知部D1用の線と電気的に接続されている。毛切断部材3が装置本体2に取り付けられることで、検知部D1の受光素子は、接続線(101,102)を介して制御回路6と電気的に接続されることになる。検知部D1は、受光面D10から入射した光強度に応じた電気信号(検知信号)を、接続線(101,102)を介して制御回路6に出力する。 The light receiving element of the detection unit D1 is electrically connected to the wire for the detection unit D1 among the plurality of first connection lines 101. By attaching the hair cutting member 3 to the device main body 2, the light receiving element of the detection unit D1 is electrically connected to the control circuit 6 via the connection line (101, 102). The detection unit D1 outputs an electric signal (detection signal) corresponding to the light intensity incident from the light receiving surface D10 to the control circuit 6 via the connection line (101, 102).
 ユーザが毛切断装置1を使用中において、光源21から出力された光は、検知領域D2にて対象光OB1となって、その光強度が検知部D1で検知される。本実施形態の毛切断装置1は、検知部D1による光強度の検知結果を、毛切断装置1の異常状態、及び劣化状態(それらの予兆も含む)について判定(推定)するための判定材料の1つとし、光源21の光出力に関する制御を行う。 While the user is using the hair cutting device 1, the light output from the light source 21 becomes the target light OB1 in the detection area D2, and the light intensity thereof is detected by the detection unit D1. The hair cutting device 1 of the present embodiment is a determination material for determining (estimating) the detection result of the light intensity by the detection unit D1 regarding the abnormal state and the deteriorated state (including the signs thereof) of the hair cutting device 1. One is to control the light output of the light source 21.
 (2.4)使用例
 次に、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1の使用例について、図7A~図8Bを参照して説明する。
(2.4) Example of Use Next, an example of using the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 7A to 8B.
 すなわち、本実施形態では、上述した構成の毛切断装置1は、毛91(ここでは「ひげ」)の切断(ここでは「剃る」)に用いられる。その際、ユーザは、毛切断装置1の装置本体2(グリップ)を片手で握って毛切断装置1を把持した状態で、毛切断部材3(ヘッド)、つまりカバー30のY軸の負の向きを向いた面をユーザの皮膚92に接触させる。これにより、図7Aに示すように、切断対象である毛91は、保持部材5で保持された光放出部40と対向する位置に、開口部31からカバー30内に導入される。 That is, in the present embodiment, the hair cutting device 1 having the above-described configuration is used for cutting (here, “shaving”) the hair 91 (here, “whisker”). At that time, the user holds the device body 2 (grip) of the hair cutting device 1 with one hand and holds the hair cutting device 1, and the hair cutting member 3 (head), that is, the negative direction of the Y axis of the cover 30. The surface facing the user is brought into contact with the user's skin 92. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7A, the hair 91 to be cut is introduced into the cover 30 from the opening 31 at a position facing the light emitting portion 40 held by the holding member 5.
 図7Aに示すように、光放出部40が毛91に接触していない状態では、光放出部40には空気が接することになるため、光放出部40と空気との屈折率の差によって、光放出部40からの光の漏れはほとんど生じない。この状態で、ユーザは、毛切断装置1としての毛切断部材3を、皮膚92の表面921に沿って図7Aにおける矢印A1の向きに移動させる。 As shown in FIG. 7A, when the light emitting unit 40 is not in contact with the hair 91, air comes into contact with the light emitting unit 40. Therefore, due to the difference in the refractive index between the light emitting unit 40 and the air, Almost no light leaks from the light emitting unit 40. In this state, the user moves the hair cutting member 3 as the hair cutting device 1 along the surface 921 of the skin 92 in the direction of the arrow A1 in FIG. 7A.
 毛切断部材3の移動に伴って、図7Bに示すように、光放出部40は、毛切断部材3の進行方向の前方(つまりZ軸の正の向き)に位置する毛91に接触する。このとき、光放出部40と毛91との屈折率の差によって、光放出部40からの光が毛91に漏れ出すようにして毛91に放出する。すなわち、光放出部40の屈折率は、切断対象である毛91の屈折率よりも小さいので、光放出部40に毛91が接触した状態では、光放出部40から毛91に光が漏れ出すことになり、光放出部40から毛91に光が放出される。 As the hair cutting member 3 moves, as shown in FIG. 7B, the light emitting unit 40 comes into contact with the hair 91 located in front of the hair cutting member 3 in the traveling direction (that is, in the positive direction of the Z axis). At this time, due to the difference in the refractive index between the light emitting unit 40 and the hair 91, the light from the light emitting unit 40 leaks to the hair 91 and is emitted to the hair 91. That is, since the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the hair 91 to be cut, light leaks from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91 when the hair 91 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40. Therefore, light is emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91.
 さらに、図7Bに示す状態において、光放出部40から毛91に放出される光の一部が散乱することで、光放出部40からの光は、毛91の周辺の皮膚92にも放出することになる。具体的には、光放出部40における毛91との接触部位から漏れ出た光の一部は、毛91にて散乱して皮膚92に放出する。ここで、図7Bに示すように、主として毛91に放出する光を第1放出光Op1、主として皮膚92に放出する光を第2放出光Op2とする。すなわち、光放出部40に毛91が接触した状態においては、光放出部40からは、第1放出光Op1が毛91に放出されるとともに、第2放出光Op2が皮膚92に放出する。 Further, in the state shown in FIG. 7B, a part of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91 is scattered, so that the light from the light emitting unit 40 is also emitted to the skin 92 around the hair 91. It will be. Specifically, a part of the light leaked from the contact portion with the hair 91 in the light emitting unit 40 is scattered by the hair 91 and emitted to the skin 92. Here, as shown in FIG. 7B, the light mainly emitted to the hair 91 is referred to as the first emitted light Op1, and the light mainly emitted to the skin 92 is referred to as the second emitted light Op2. That is, in a state where the hair 91 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40, the first emitted light Op1 is emitted to the hair 91 and the second emitted light Op2 is emitted to the skin 92 from the light emitting unit 40.
 特に、光放出部40から毛91に第1放出光Op1が放出すると、光放出部40から毛91に放出する光(第1放出光Op1)のエネルギにて、毛91が切断される。要するに、本実施形態では、光源21から出力されて光導波路4を通る光の波長(例えば400nm以上700nm以下)は、毛91の中の発色団(分子にその色を提供する分子の一部)によって吸収される光の波長を含む。したがって、第1放出光Op1は、毛91の発色団によって吸収されることで熱に変換され、この熱をもって、毛91の分子の結合を破壊、又は毛91を溶融若しくは燃焼させる。光放出部40から毛91に放出する光(第1放出光Op1)の標的となり得る発色団は、例えば、ケラチン及び水等の発色団を含む。 In particular, when the first emitted light Op1 is emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91, the hair 91 is cut by the energy of the light (first emitted light Op1) emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91. In short, in the present embodiment, the wavelength of the light output from the light source 21 and passing through the optical waveguide 4 (for example, 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less) is the chromophore in the hair 91 (a part of the molecule that provides the color to the molecule). Includes the wavelength of light absorbed by. Therefore, the first emitted light Op1 is absorbed by the chromophore of the hair 91 and converted into heat, and the heat breaks the molecular bonds of the hair 91 or melts or burns the hair 91. The chromophore that can be the target of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91 (first emitted light Op1) includes, for example, a chromophore such as keratin and water.
 上述のように、ユーザが、毛切断装置1としての毛切断部材3を、皮膚92に沿って矢印A1(図7A参照)の向きに移動させることで、皮膚92から突出した毛91を切断することができる。したがって、光導波路4が通過した後は、図7Cに示すように、皮膚92には、切り残しとなる毛91の根元部分のみが残ることになる。 As described above, the user cuts the hair 91 protruding from the skin 92 by moving the hair cutting member 3 as the hair cutting device 1 in the direction of the arrow A1 (see FIG. 7A) along the skin 92. be able to. Therefore, after the optical waveguide 4 has passed, as shown in FIG. 7C, only the root portion of the hair 91, which is left uncut, remains on the skin 92.
 ただし、毛切断装置1では、図7Bに示すように、光放出部40が毛91に接触しなくても、例えば、光放出部40と空気との界面からの空気側への光(エバネッセント波)の染み出し等により、光が毛91に放出することもある。そのため、光放出部40が毛91に接触した場合のみならず、光放出部40と毛91とが接触寸前まで接近した場合等にも、毛切断装置1において、光放出部40から毛91に第1放出光Op1が放出して毛91を切断できることがある。 However, in the hair cutting device 1, as shown in FIG. 7B, even if the light emitting unit 40 does not come into contact with the hair 91, for example, light (evanescent wave) from the interface between the light emitting unit 40 and the air to the air side. ) May be emitted to the hair 91 due to exudation or the like. Therefore, not only when the light emitting unit 40 comes into contact with the hair 91, but also when the light emitting unit 40 and the hair 91 come close to each other just before contact, in the hair cutting device 1, the light emitting unit 40 becomes the hair 91. The first emitted light Op1 may be emitted to cut the hair 91.
 ところで、皮膚92の状態によっては、図8A及び図8Bに示すように、毛切断装置1を使用して毛91(ここでは「ひげ」)の切断(ここでは「剃る」)を行う際に、光放出部40が皮膚92の一部に接触する場合もある。図8A及び図8Bは、皮膚92における毛91の周辺(毛根周辺)に、一例としてニキビ等の隆起部922が存在する場合の、毛切断装置1の使用例を示す。隆起部922は、皮膚92のうち、隆起部922の周辺の皮膚92の表面921に比較して盛り上がった(隆起した)部位である。 By the way, depending on the condition of the skin 92, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, when the hair 91 (here, “whisker”) is cut (here, “shaving”) using the hair cutting device 1. The light emitting portion 40 may come into contact with a part of the skin 92. 8A and 8B show an example of using the hair cutting device 1 when a raised portion 922 such as acne is present around the hair 91 (around the hair root) in the skin 92 as an example. The raised portion 922 is a raised (raised) portion of the skin 92 as compared with the surface 921 of the skin 92 around the raised portion 922.
 すなわち、図8Aに示すように、光放出部40が毛91に接触していない状態では、光放出部40には空気が接することになるため、光放出部40と空気との屈折率の差によって、光放出部40からの光の漏れはほとんど生じない。この状態で、ユーザは、毛切断部材3を、皮膚92の表面921に沿って図8Aにおける矢印A1の向きに移動させる。 That is, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the light emitting unit 40 is not in contact with the hair 91, air comes into contact with the light emitting unit 40, so that the difference in the refractive index between the light emitting unit 40 and the air is different. As a result, almost no light leaks from the light emitting unit 40. In this state, the user moves the hair cutting member 3 along the surface 921 of the skin 92 in the direction of arrow A1 in FIG. 8A.
 毛切断部材3の移動に伴って、図8Bに示すように、光放出部40は、毛切断部材3の進行方向の前方(つまりZ軸の正の向き)に位置する毛91に接触する。このとき、光放出部40と毛91との屈折率の差によって、光放出部40からの光(第1放出光Op1)が毛91に漏れ出すようにして毛91に放出する。光放出部40から毛91に第1放出光Op1が放出すると、光放出部40から毛91に放出する光(第1放出光Op1)のエネルギにて、毛91が切断される。 As the hair cutting member 3 moves, as shown in FIG. 8B, the light emitting unit 40 comes into contact with the hair 91 located in front of the hair cutting member 3 in the traveling direction (that is, in the positive direction of the Z axis). At this time, due to the difference in the refractive index between the light emitting unit 40 and the hair 91, the light from the light emitting unit 40 (first emitted light Op1) leaks to the hair 91 and is emitted to the hair 91. When the first emitted light Op1 is emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91, the hair 91 is cut by the energy of the light (first emitted light Op1) emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91.
 さらに、図8Bに示す状態において、光放出部40は、皮膚92における毛91の周辺の隆起部922にも接触する。このとき、光放出部40と皮膚92の表面921(隆起部922)との屈折率の差によって、光放出部40からの光が皮膚92に漏れ出すようにして皮膚92に放出する。すなわち、光放出部40の屈折率は、皮膚92の表面921の屈折率よりも小さいので、光放出部40に皮膚92が接触した状態では、光放出部40から皮膚92に光が漏れ出すことになり、光放出部40から皮膚92に光(第2放出光Op2)が放出される。このとき、光放出部40から皮膚92には第2放出光Op2が直接的に放出され、第2放出光Op2は、主として隆起部922に放出される。特に本実施形態では、光導波路4のうち、隆起部922に直接接触する部位は、クラッド部42となる可能性が高く、第2放出光Op2のエネルギは、第1放出光Op1に比べて低い。 Further, in the state shown in FIG. 8B, the light emitting portion 40 also contacts the raised portion 922 around the hair 91 in the skin 92. At this time, due to the difference in the refractive index between the light emitting portion 40 and the surface 921 (raised portion 922) of the skin 92, the light from the light emitting portion 40 leaks to the skin 92 and is emitted to the skin 92. That is, since the refractive index of the light emitting unit 40 is smaller than the refractive index of the surface 921 of the skin 92, light leaks from the light emitting unit 40 to the skin 92 when the skin 92 is in contact with the light emitting unit 40. Then, light (second emitted light Op2) is emitted from the light emitting portion 40 to the skin 92. At this time, the second emitted light Op2 is directly emitted from the light emitting portion 40 to the skin 92, and the second emitted light Op2 is mainly emitted to the raised portion 922. In particular, in the present embodiment, the portion of the optical waveguide 4 that comes into direct contact with the raised portion 922 is likely to be the clad portion 42, and the energy of the second emitted light Op2 is lower than that of the first emitted light Op1. ..
 (2.5)毛切断部材の交換
 ところで、本実施形態では、フェルール71がレセプタクル部81から取り外し可能であることから、毛切断部材3の取り替え(交換)が容易である。以下、毛切断部材3の交換作業について説明する。
(2.5) Replacement of Hair Cutting Member In the present embodiment, since the ferrule 71 is removable from the receptacle portion 81, the hair cutting member 3 can be easily replaced (replaced). Hereinafter, the replacement work of the hair cutting member 3 will be described.
 毛切断部材3は、経年劣化によって、交換時期が到来する可能性がある。具体的には、光導波路4の光放出部40が、皮膚92及び毛91等と繰り返し接触することによってダメージを受け、光の放出量が低減し、毛91を切断しきれない状況になる可能性がある。 There is a possibility that the hair cutting member 3 will be replaced due to deterioration over time. Specifically, the light emitting portion 40 of the optical waveguide 4 may be damaged by repeated contact with the skin 92, the hair 91, etc., the amount of light emitted may be reduced, and the hair 91 may not be completely cut. There is sex.
 まずユーザは、装置本体2に装着中にある古くなった毛切断部材3を装置本体2から取り外す作業を行う。具体的には、ユーザは、毛切断部材3の固定キャップ34を緩める方向に指で回転させる。その結果、レセプタクル部81のねじ部810に締結されていたねじ溝341が緩まりながら、固定キャップ34は、X軸の正の方向に移動し、最終的にレセプタクル部81から抜け出す。この状態で、ユーザは、カバー30の外側を手で把持しながらX軸の正の方向へ引っ張ることで、フェルール71、及びホルダ部H1を介してフェルール71と一体的に結合されている光放出モジュールM1を、X軸の正の方向へ引き抜くことができる。その際に、溝部814内に嵌っていた凸部H11も、溝部814に沿ってX軸の正の方向へ移動し、最終的に溝部814から抜け出る(図3参照)。 First, the user performs the work of removing the old hair cutting member 3 that is being attached to the device main body 2 from the device main body 2. Specifically, the user rotates the fixing cap 34 of the hair cutting member 3 in the direction of loosening with a finger. As a result, the fixing cap 34 moves in the positive direction of the X-axis while the thread groove 341 fastened to the threaded portion 810 of the receptacle portion 81 is loosened, and finally comes out of the receptacle portion 81. In this state, the user holds the outside of the cover 30 by hand and pulls it in the positive direction of the X-axis to emit light that is integrally coupled to the ferrule 71 via the ferrule 71 and the holder portion H1. Module M1 can be pulled out in the positive direction of the X-axis. At that time, the convex portion H11 fitted in the groove portion 814 also moves in the positive direction of the X axis along the groove portion 814, and finally exits from the groove portion 814 (see FIG. 3).
 続いて、ユーザは、例えば新品の毛切断部材3を装置本体2に取り付ける作業を行う。具体的には、ユーザは、そのカバー30の外側を手で把持しながら、先端側にあるフェルール71がレセプタクル部81内に挿入されるように、X軸の負の方向へ押し込む。その際に、ユーザは、ホルダ部H1の凸部H11を目印にしながら、毛切断部材3の周方向の向きを調整する。つまり、ユーザは、凸部H11が、X軸方向において溝部814と対向するように、毛切断部材3の周方向の向きを調整する。そして、凸部H11が溝部814に向かって挿入されるように、そのカバー30をX軸の負の方向へ押し込む。 Subsequently, the user performs a work of attaching, for example, a new hair cutting member 3 to the apparatus main body 2. Specifically, the user holds the outside of the cover 30 by hand and pushes the ferrule 71 on the distal end side in the negative direction of the X-axis so that the ferrule 71 is inserted into the receptacle portion 81. At that time, the user adjusts the orientation of the hair cutting member 3 in the circumferential direction while using the convex portion H11 of the holder portion H1 as a mark. That is, the user adjusts the orientation of the hair cutting member 3 in the circumferential direction so that the convex portion H11 faces the groove portion 814 in the X-axis direction. Then, the cover 30 is pushed in the negative direction of the X-axis so that the convex portion H11 is inserted toward the groove portion 814.
 結果として、フェルール71は、レセプタクル部81内の小径孔812に嵌り込み、ホルダ部H1は、レセプタクル部81内の大径孔813に嵌り込む。この時点で、装置本体2に対する毛切断部材3の周方向に沿った回転が規制されることになる。そして、受光面40Aは、光学系22(第4レンズ224)と近接して対向し、更にコア部41の光軸C1が、光学系22の光軸CX1と、(ユーザが意識しなくても自動的に)合致することになる。要するに、光放出モジュールM1に関する位置決めが容易となっていて、組立性が改善される。 As a result, the ferrule 71 is fitted into the small diameter hole 812 in the receptacle portion 81, and the holder portion H1 is fitted into the large diameter hole 813 in the receptacle portion 81. At this point, the rotation of the hair cutting member 3 with respect to the apparatus main body 2 along the circumferential direction is restricted. The light receiving surface 40A faces the optical system 22 (fourth lens 224) in close proximity to each other, and the optical axis C1 of the core portion 41 meets the optical axis CX1 of the optical system 22 (even if the user is not aware of it). It will match (automatically). In short, the positioning of the light emitting module M1 is facilitated, and the assembling property is improved.
 最後にユーザは、固定キャップ34をレセプタクル部81に取り付けることで、毛切断部材3が装置本体2から抜けにくくなる。なお、毛切断部材3のうち、固定キャップ34は、使いまわしでもよいし、新しいものと交換されてもよい。 Finally, by attaching the fixing cap 34 to the receptacle portion 81, the hair cutting member 3 is less likely to come off from the device main body 2. Of the hair cutting members 3, the fixing cap 34 may be reused or replaced with a new one.
 このように毛切断部材3は、装置本体2のレセプタクル部81から取り外し可能に装着されるため、結果的に、組立性が改善されていて、また光学調整が容易である。 As described above, the hair cutting member 3 is detachably attached to the receptacle portion 81 of the apparatus main body 2, and as a result, the assembling property is improved and the optical adjustment is easy.
 上記の例では、ユーザの交換作業を想定して説明したが、この組立性の改善は、ユーザの交換作業のみに作用するものではなく、例えば、毛切断装置1の製造時における作業者の組立作業にも作用し得る。 In the above example, the description has been made assuming the user's replacement work, but this improvement in assembling property does not affect only the user's replacement work. For example, the assembly of the worker at the time of manufacturing the hair cutting device 1 It can also work.
 ところで、毛切断装置1の制御回路6は、検知部D1の検知結果に基づき、毛切断装置1が特定状態にあると判定する場合がある。ここでいう「特定状態」とは、例えば、異常、汚れ、又は経年劣化等が発生している状態であり、それらの予兆も含み得る。毛切断装置1は、通知部27から、特定状態にある旨をユーザに通知する。ユーザは、通知部27を通じて、例えば毛切断部材3の光導波路4が経年劣化を起こしていることを知れば、毛切断部材3を交換する。 By the way, the control circuit 6 of the hair cutting device 1 may determine that the hair cutting device 1 is in a specific state based on the detection result of the detection unit D1. The "specific state" referred to here is, for example, a state in which an abnormality, stain, aged deterioration, or the like has occurred, and may include signs thereof. The hair cutting device 1 notifies the user that it is in a specific state from the notification unit 27. When the user learns through the notification unit 27 that, for example, the optical waveguide 4 of the hair cutting member 3 has deteriorated over time, the hair cutting member 3 is replaced.
 (2.6)制御回路
 次に、制御回路6の構成について、図9~図11を参照して説明する。
(2.6) Control Circuit Next, the configuration of the control circuit 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11.
 制御回路6は、図9に示すように、光源21、電池23、ファン24、操作部26及び通知部27等に電気的に接続されている。また制御回路6は、毛切断部材3が装置本体2に取り付けられた状態において、複数の接続線(101,102)を介して、検知部D1、第1センサ部S11、及び第2センサ部S12の各々と電気的に接続される。 As shown in FIG. 9, the control circuit 6 is electrically connected to a light source 21, a battery 23, a fan 24, an operation unit 26, a notification unit 27, and the like. Further, the control circuit 6 has a detection unit D1, a first sensor unit S11, and a second sensor unit S12 via a plurality of connection lines (101, 102) in a state where the hair cutting member 3 is attached to the apparatus main body 2. It is electrically connected to each of the.
 制御回路6は、入力部61と、モード切替部62と、出力調整部63と、駆動部64と、判定部65と、を有している。 The control circuit 6 has an input unit 61, a mode switching unit 62, an output adjusting unit 63, a driving unit 64, and a determination unit 65.
 制御回路6は、例えば、1以上のプロセッサ及び1以上のメモリを有するマイクロコントローラを含んでいる。マイクロコントローラは、1以上のメモリに記録されているプログラムを1以上のプロセッサで実行することにより、制御回路6としての機能を実現する。プログラムは、予めメモリに記録されていてもよいし、メモリカードのような非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されたり、電気通信回線を通して提供されたりしてもよい。言い換えれば、上記プログラムは、1以上のプロセッサを、制御回路6として機能させるためのプログラムである。 The control circuit 6 includes, for example, a microcontroller having one or more processors and one or more memories. The microcontroller realizes the function as the control circuit 6 by executing the program recorded in one or more memories by one or more processors. The program may be pre-recorded in memory, may be recorded and provided on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, or may be provided through a telecommunication line. In other words, the above program is a program for making one or more processors function as the control circuit 6.
 入力部61には、ユーザの操作に応じた電気信号が、操作部26から入力される。例えば、操作部26が、主電源のオン/オフの切り替え、又は、動作モードの切り替え等の操作を受け付けた場合に、その操作に応じた電気信号が入力部61に入力される。 An electric signal corresponding to the user's operation is input to the input unit 61 from the operation unit 26. For example, when the operation unit 26 accepts an operation such as switching on / off of the main power supply or switching the operation mode, an electric signal corresponding to the operation is input to the input unit 61.
 モード切替部62は、光源21の動作モードの切り替えを行う。本実施形態では、光源21の動作モードとしては、後述する第1モード及び第2モードの2種類のモードを有している。モード切替部62は、例えば、入力部61からの電気信号に従って、これら第1モードと第2モードとの切り替えを行う。 The mode switching unit 62 switches the operation mode of the light source 21. In the present embodiment, the light source 21 has two types of operation modes, a first mode and a second mode, which will be described later. The mode switching unit 62 switches between the first mode and the second mode according to, for example, an electric signal from the input unit 61.
 駆動部64は、光源21に電力を供給することで光源21を駆動する。つまり、駆動部64は、半導体レーザからなる光源21に駆動電流I1を供給することで、光源21を発光(点灯)させる。ここで、駆動部64は、光源21を駆動する際には、図9に示すように、発光期間T1と消灯期間T2とを交互に繰り返す矩形波状の駆動電流I1を光源21に供給することで、光源21を発光させる。つまり、駆動部64は、パルス電流からなる駆動電流I1を光源21に供給し、これを受けて、光源21は間欠的に光を発生(点滅)する。 The drive unit 64 drives the light source 21 by supplying electric power to the light source 21. That is, the drive unit 64 causes the light source 21 to emit light (lights up) by supplying the drive current I1 to the light source 21 made of a semiconductor laser. Here, when the light source 21 is driven, the drive unit 64 supplies the light source 21 with a rectangular wave-shaped drive current I1 that alternately repeats the light emission period T1 and the extinguishing period T2, as shown in FIG. , Light source 21 is made to emit light. That is, the drive unit 64 supplies a drive current I1 composed of a pulse current to the light source 21, and in response to this, the light source 21 intermittently generates (blinks) light.
 すなわち、駆動電流I1の発光期間T1に光源21は発光し、駆動電流I1の消灯期間T2に光源21は消灯するので、光源21は駆動電流I1の周波数に合わせて間欠的に光を発生(点滅)する。要するに、光源21は、発光期間T1及び消灯期間T2を繰り返すことにより間欠的に光を発生する。本実施形態では一例として、駆動電流I1のデューティ(1周期に占める発光期間T1の割合)は50%であると仮定する。つまり、発光期間T1の時間長さと消灯期間T2の時間長さとは等しい。 That is, since the light source 21 emits light during the light emission period T1 of the drive current I1 and the light source 21 turns off during the extinguishing period T2 of the drive current I1, the light source 21 intermittently generates light (blinks) according to the frequency of the drive current I1. )do. In short, the light source 21 intermittently generates light by repeating the light emission period T1 and the extinguishing period T2. In this embodiment, as an example, it is assumed that the duty of the drive current I1 (the ratio of the light emitting period T1 to one cycle) is 50%. That is, the time length of the light emitting period T1 and the time length of the extinguishing period T2 are equal to each other.
 ところで、本実施形態では、光源21の動作モードとしては、第1モード及び第2モードの2種類のモードを有している。 By the way, in the present embodiment, the light source 21 has two types of operation modes, a first mode and a second mode.
 第1モードは、皮膚92への作用を優先するモードであって、発光期間T1の時間長さが1万分の1秒以下となるモードである。つまり、光源21の動作モードが第1モードであれば、光源21の発光期間T1の時間長さは、1万分の1秒以下である。言い換えれば、第1モードにおいては、駆動部64は、周波数が5kHz以上の駆動電流I1にて光源21を駆動する。これにより、光源21が連続的に光を発生する最大時間は、10000分の1秒(1/10000s)以下となる。本実施形態では一例として、光源21の動作モードが第1モードである場合における、光源21の発光期間T1の時間長さは15000分の1秒である。 The first mode is a mode in which the action on the skin 92 is prioritized, and the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1 / 10,000 second or less. That is, if the operation mode of the light source 21 is the first mode, the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1 / 10,000 second or less. In other words, in the first mode, the drive unit 64 drives the light source 21 with a drive current I1 having a frequency of 5 kHz or more. As a result, the maximum time for the light source 21 to continuously generate light is 1/10000 second (1 / 10,000s) or less. In the present embodiment, as an example, when the operation mode of the light source 21 is the first mode, the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1/15000 second.
 第2モードは、毛91の切断を優先するモードであって、発光期間T1の時間長さが百分の1秒以上となるモードである。つまり、光源21の動作モードが第2モードであれば、光源21の発光期間T1の時間長さは、百分の1秒以上である。言い換えれば、第2モードにおいては、駆動部64は、周波数が50Hz以下の駆動電流I1にて光源21を駆動する。これにより、光源21が連続的に光を発生する最小時間は、100分の1秒(1/100s)以上となる。本実施形態では一例として、光源21の動作モードが第2モードである場合における、光源21の発光期間T1の時間長さは80分の1秒である。 The second mode is a mode in which the cutting of the hair 91 is prioritized, and the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1/100 second or more. That is, when the operation mode of the light source 21 is the second mode, the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1/100 second or more. In other words, in the second mode, the drive unit 64 drives the light source 21 with a drive current I1 having a frequency of 50 Hz or less. As a result, the minimum time for the light source 21 to continuously generate light is 1/100 second (1 / 100s) or more. In the present embodiment, as an example, when the operation mode of the light source 21 is the second mode, the time length of the light emission period T1 of the light source 21 is 1/80 second.
 ここで、制御回路6は、これら第1モードと第2モードとの切り替えを行うモード切替部62を有している。すなわち、本実施形態では、光源21の動作モードは、発光期間T1の時間長さが1万分の1秒以下である第1モードと、発光期間T1の時間長さが百分の1秒以上である第2モードと、の切り替えが可能である。 Here, the control circuit 6 has a mode switching unit 62 for switching between the first mode and the second mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the light source 21 is the first mode in which the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1 / 10,000 second or less, and the time length of the light emitting period T1 is 1/100 second or more. It is possible to switch between a certain second mode.
 出力調整部63は、駆動部64を制御することで光源21の出力を調整する。出力調整部63での調整対象となる光源21の出力は、光源21が発生する光強度(明るさ)及び光の波長等を含む。出力調整部63は、例えば、入力部61からの電気信号に従って、光源21の出力の調整を行う。 The output adjusting unit 63 adjusts the output of the light source 21 by controlling the driving unit 64. The output of the light source 21 to be adjusted by the output adjusting unit 63 includes the light intensity (brightness) generated by the light source 21, the wavelength of light, and the like. The output adjusting unit 63 adjusts the output of the light source 21 according to, for example, an electric signal from the input unit 61.
 特に、本実施形態では、上述したように、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、光源21からの出力にて調整されている。そのため、出力調整部63は、光源21の出力の大きさ(パワー密度)を調整することによって、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度を調整する。具体的には、出力調整部63は、駆動部64から光源21に供給される駆動電流I1の大きさを変化させることで、光源21から光導波路4に出力される光のパワー密度を調整する。 In particular, in the present embodiment, as described above, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is adjusted by the output from the light source 21. Therefore, the output adjusting unit 63 adjusts the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 by adjusting the output magnitude (power density) of the light source 21. Specifically, the output adjusting unit 63 adjusts the power density of the light output from the light source 21 to the optical waveguide 4 by changing the magnitude of the driving current I1 supplied from the driving unit 64 to the light source 21. ..
 さらに、上述したように、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が可変である場合、パワー密度の変化は、出力調整部63にて実現される。すなわち、出力調整部63は、光源21の出力の大きさ(パワー密度)を変化させることで、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度を変化させる。出力調整部63は、例えば、入力部61からの電気信号に従って、これら光源21の出力の大きさ(パワー密度)を変化させる。 Further, as described above, when the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is variable, the change in the power density is realized by the output adjusting unit 63. That is, the output adjusting unit 63 changes the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 by changing the magnitude (power density) of the output of the light source 21. The output adjusting unit 63 changes the magnitude (power density) of the outputs of these light sources 21 according to, for example, an electric signal from the input unit 61.
 なお、出力調整部63は、後述する判定部65からの制御を受けて、光源21の出力を調整することもある。 The output adjusting unit 63 may adjust the output of the light source 21 under the control of the determination unit 65, which will be described later.
 次に、制御回路6における皮膚92の接触状態に関する判定処理について説明する。 Next, the determination process regarding the contact state of the skin 92 in the control circuit 6 will be described.
 制御回路6の判定部65は、接触面(モジュール側接触面501及びカバー側接触面301)に対する皮膚92の接触状態を判定する(判定処理の実行)。具体的には、判定部65は、皮膚92が非接触状態から接触状態に切り替わったこと、及び、皮膚92が接触状態から非接触状態に切り替わったことを判定(推定)する。 The determination unit 65 of the control circuit 6 determines the contact state of the skin 92 with the contact surfaces (module side contact surface 501 and cover side contact surface 301) (execution of the determination process). Specifically, the determination unit 65 determines (estimates) that the skin 92 has switched from the non-contact state to the contact state and that the skin 92 has switched from the contact state to the non-contact state.
 本実施形態では、判定部65は、センサ部S1(第1センサ部S11、第2センサ部S12)から受信する電気信号に基づいて、接触状態を判定する。そして、判定部65は、判定結果に基づいて、駆動部64(又は出力調整部63)を制御して、光源21の駆動を開始して光出力を実行させたり、光源21の駆動を停止(光出力の低下でもよい)したりする。 In the present embodiment, the determination unit 65 determines the contact state based on the electric signal received from the sensor unit S1 (first sensor unit S11, second sensor unit S12). Then, the determination unit 65 controls the drive unit 64 (or the output adjustment unit 63) based on the determination result to start driving the light source 21 to execute the optical output or stop the drive of the light source 21 (the drive of the light source 21 is stopped). The light output may decrease).
 判定部65は、例えば、操作部26を通じて主電源をオフからオンに切り替える操作を受け付けると、接触判定処理の実行を開始する。言い換えると、本実施形態では一例として、操作部26を通じて主電源がオンになると、制御回路6は、光源21の駆動を開始可能なスタンバイ状態となる。したがって、駆動部64は、主電源がオンに切り替わっても直ちに光源21の駆動を開始しない。 When the determination unit 65 receives, for example, an operation of switching the main power from off to on through the operation unit 26, the determination unit 65 starts executing the contact determination process. In other words, as an example in this embodiment, when the main power supply is turned on through the operation unit 26, the control circuit 6 is in a standby state in which the drive of the light source 21 can be started. Therefore, the drive unit 64 does not immediately start driving the light source 21 even when the main power supply is switched on.
 判定部65は、センサ部S1からの検知信号に基づき、皮膚92が非接触状態から接触状態に切り替わったと判定すると、光放出モジュールM1からの光出力を実行する。つまり、判定部65は、駆動部64に光源21の駆動を開始させる。例えば人体のようにグランド電位の物体が、センサ部S1に接触(タッチ)することで、電極S2と人体とによって擬似的なコンデンサが形成される。その結果、人の皮膚92の接触が、各センサ部S1(コンデンサ)の静電容量の変化として現れる。判定部65は、受信する検知信号を通じて、例えば静電容量の変化に対応する電圧の変化を監視する。 When the determination unit 65 determines that the skin 92 has switched from the non-contact state to the contact state based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1, the determination unit 65 executes the light output from the light emission module M1. That is, the determination unit 65 causes the drive unit 64 to start driving the light source 21. For example, when an object having a ground potential, such as a human body, comes into contact with (touches) the sensor unit S1, a pseudo capacitor is formed by the electrode S2 and the human body. As a result, the contact of the human skin 92 appears as a change in the capacitance of each sensor unit S1 (capacitor). The determination unit 65 monitors, for example, a change in voltage corresponding to a change in capacitance through a received detection signal.
 判定部65は、第1センサ部S11の電圧レベルと第2センサ部S12の電圧レベルの両方(いずれか一方でもよい)が閾値を超えた場合に、皮膚92が非接触状態から接触状態に切り替わったと判定する。 The determination unit 65 switches the skin 92 from the non-contact state to the contact state when both the voltage level of the first sensor unit S11 and the voltage level of the second sensor unit S12 (whichever may be one) exceed the threshold value. Judged as
 また判定部65は、センサ部S1からの検知信号に基づき、皮膚92が接触状態から非接触状態に切り替わったと判定すると、光放出モジュールM1からの光出力を制限する。つまり、判定部65は、駆動部64に光源21の駆動を停止させる(光出力を低下させてもよい)。判定部65は、第1センサ部S11の電圧レベルと第2センサ部S12の電圧レベルの両方(いずれか一方でもよい)が閾値未満となった場合に、皮膚92が非接触状態から接触状態に切り替わったと判定する。 Further, when the determination unit 65 determines that the skin 92 has switched from the contact state to the non-contact state based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1, the determination unit 65 limits the light output from the light emission module M1. That is, the determination unit 65 causes the drive unit 64 to stop driving the light source 21 (the light output may be reduced). The determination unit 65 changes the skin 92 from the non-contact state to the contact state when both the voltage level of the first sensor unit S11 and the voltage level of the second sensor unit S12 (either of them may be) becomes less than the threshold value. It is determined that the switch has been made.
 図10Aは、一例として、時刻t1で皮膚92が接触状態から非接触状態に切り替わり、時刻t2で皮膚92が非接触状態から再び接触状態に切り替わった場合における、光出力の変化(オン/オフ)を示すグラフである。つまり、図10Aの例では、判定部65は、時刻t1に、皮膚92が離れたと判定して、駆動中にあった光源21を停止させている。また図10Aの例では、判定部65は、時刻t2に、皮膚92が接触したと判定して、光源21の駆動を開始させている。 FIG. 10A shows, as an example, a change (on / off) in the light output when the skin 92 switches from the contact state to the non-contact state at time t1 and the skin 92 switches from the non-contact state to the contact state again at time t2. It is a graph which shows. That is, in the example of FIG. 10A, the determination unit 65 determines that the skin 92 has been separated at time t1 and stops the light source 21 that was being driven. Further, in the example of FIG. 10A, the determination unit 65 determines that the skin 92 has come into contact with the skin 92 at time t2, and starts driving the light source 21.
 ここで本実施形態の毛切断装置1は、検知部D1を用いて、検知領域D2内の対象光OB1を検知する(検知ステップ)。具体的には、判定部65は、検知部D1から受信する検知信号に基づき、毛切断装置1の光出力に関する診断処理を行う。すなわち、判定部65は、検知部D1による対象光OB1に関する検知結果に基づき、毛切断装置1の光出力に関する状態が特定状態にあるか否かを判定する。 Here, the hair cutting device 1 of the present embodiment detects the target light OB1 in the detection area D2 by using the detection unit D1 (detection step). Specifically, the determination unit 65 performs diagnostic processing regarding the optical output of the hair cutting device 1 based on the detection signal received from the detection unit D1. That is, the determination unit 65 determines whether or not the state regarding the light output of the hair cutting device 1 is in the specific state based on the detection result regarding the target light OB1 by the detection unit D1.
 上述の通り、毛切断装置1が、特定状態(ここでは光源21、光学系22、及び光導波路4等のいずれかに異常、経年劣化、又は汚れが発生した状態)になると、正常状態の場合に比べて、検知部D1が受光する光強度は低下することになる。フォトダイオードには光強度に比例した電流が流れるため、判定部65は、検知部D1から、フォトダイオードに流れる電流が電圧に変換された検知信号を受信する。つまり、判定部65は、受信する検知信号を通じて、例えば電圧の変化を監視する。言い換えると、判定部65は、光強度に関する情報を検知部D1から取得する。電流電圧変換は、制御回路6で行われてもよい。 As described above, when the hair cutting device 1 is in a specific state (here, an abnormality, aged deterioration, or dirt is generated in any one of the light source 21, the optical system 22, the optical waveguide 4, etc.), it is in a normal state. The light intensity received by the detection unit D1 is lower than that of the detection unit D1. Since a current proportional to the light intensity flows through the photodiode, the determination unit 65 receives a detection signal from the detection unit D1 in which the current flowing through the photodiode is converted into a voltage. That is, the determination unit 65 monitors, for example, a change in voltage through the received detection signal. In other words, the determination unit 65 acquires information on the light intensity from the detection unit D1. The current-voltage conversion may be performed by the control circuit 6.
 判定部65は、検知部D1が受光する光強度が所定値未満となった場合に、つまり検知部D1から受信する検知信号の信号レベル(例えば電圧)が基準値Rf1(図10B参照)未満となった場合に、特定状態にあると判定する。図10Bでは、電圧値V2は、正常状態における電圧値である。また電圧値V1は、特定状態における電圧値である。基準値Rf1は、例えば、電圧値V1と電圧値V2との間に設定されている。図10Bの例では、時刻t3に正常状態から異常状態(特定状態)となった場合の、検知部D1から受信する検知信号の信号レベル(電圧)の変化を模式的に示している。つまり、図10Bは、光源21や光源21を駆動する駆動部64の故障、又は光導波路4の破損等の「異常」が発生して、急激に電圧が低下した一例を示す。 When the light intensity received by the detection unit D1 is less than a predetermined value, that is, the signal level (for example, voltage) of the detection signal received from the detection unit D1 is less than the reference value Rf1 (see FIG. 10B). When it becomes, it is judged that it is in a specific state. In FIG. 10B, the voltage value V2 is a voltage value in a normal state. Further, the voltage value V1 is a voltage value in a specific state. The reference value Rf1 is set between, for example, the voltage value V1 and the voltage value V2. In the example of FIG. 10B, the change in the signal level (voltage) of the detection signal received from the detection unit D1 when the normal state is changed to the abnormal state (specific state) at time t3 is schematically shown. That is, FIG. 10B shows an example in which the voltage drops sharply due to an "abnormality" such as a failure of the light source 21 or the drive unit 64 that drives the light source 21 or damage to the optical waveguide 4.
 ところで、時間経過に伴う検知信号の信号レベル(電圧)の変化の態様は、特定状態の種類によって異なり得る。例えば、特定状態の種類が、故障又は破損等の「異常」であれば、その「変化の態様」は、図10Bのように急激な低下を示す可能性が高い。一方で、特定状態の種類が、光導波路4等の「汚れ」であれば、その「変化の態様」は「異常」に比べると緩やかではあるが、例えば数週間又は数か月の期間にわたって一定の低下を示す可能性が高い。さらに特定状態の種類が、経年劣化であれば、使用開始から(想定される)光導波路4等の寿命までにわたって、「汚れ」よりも更に緩やかな低下を示す可能性が高い。つまり、時間経過に対する低下率は、「経年劣化」、「汚れ」、及び「異常」の順で大きくなっていく可能性がある。 By the way, the mode of change in the signal level (voltage) of the detection signal with the passage of time may differ depending on the type of specific state. For example, if the type of the specific state is an "abnormality" such as a failure or breakage, the "mode of change" is likely to show a sharp decrease as shown in FIG. 10B. On the other hand, if the type of the specific state is "dirt" such as the optical waveguide 4, the "mode of change" is gradual as compared with "abnormality", but is constant over a period of several weeks or months, for example. Is likely to show a decrease in. Further, if the type of the specific state is aged deterioration, there is a high possibility that the optical waveguide 4 or the like (assumed) shows a more gradual decrease than "dirt" from the start of use to the life of the optical waveguide 4. That is, the rate of decrease with the passage of time may increase in the order of "aging deterioration", "dirt", and "abnormality".
 そこで本実施形態の判定部65は、更に、対象光OB1の光強度に関する変化の態様に基づき、特定状態の種類を特定するように構成される。また制御回路6は、判定部65において、少なくとも特定状態の種類が所定の種類であることが特定された場合、光放出モジュールM1からの光出力を制限する制限部66(図9参照)を更に備えている。ここでは一例として、「特定の種類」とは、上述した「異常」であるとする。 Therefore, the determination unit 65 of the present embodiment is further configured to specify the type of the specific state based on the mode of change in the light intensity of the target light OB1. Further, the control circuit 6 further includes a limiting unit 66 (see FIG. 9) that limits the light output from the light emitting module M1 when the determination unit 65 specifies that at least the type of the specific state is a predetermined type. I have. Here, as an example, the "specific type" is assumed to be the above-mentioned "abnormality".
 制御回路6は、累積使用時間(光源21の累積駆動時間)をメモリに記憶する。また制御回路6は、その使用累積時間において検知部D1から受信した検知信号の信号レベル(電圧)をメモリに記憶する。要するに、制御回路6は、使用時間及び信号レベルに関する実績データをメモリに記憶する。 The control circuit 6 stores the cumulative usage time (cumulative drive time of the light source 21) in the memory. Further, the control circuit 6 stores in the memory the signal level (voltage) of the detection signal received from the detection unit D1 during the cumulative usage time. In short, the control circuit 6 stores the actual data regarding the usage time and the signal level in the memory.
 さらに制御回路6は、例えば「異常」に対応する基準値Rf1に加えて、基準値Rf1より高い基準値Rf2(図10B参照)をメモリに記憶する。判定部65は、現在の信号レベル(電圧)が、どの範囲に位置するかに基づいて、特定状態の種類を特定する。 Further, the control circuit 6 stores, for example, a reference value Rf2 (see FIG. 10B) higher than the reference value Rf1 in the memory in addition to the reference value Rf1 corresponding to the “abnormality”. The determination unit 65 identifies the type of the specific state based on the range in which the current signal level (voltage) is located.
 一例としては、判定部65は、現在の電圧が、0(ゼロ)以上、基準値Rf1未満であれば「異常」と判定する。また判定部65は、現在の電圧及び実績データが、所定の期間継続して、基準値Rf1以上、基準値Rf2未満であれば、「汚れ」と判定する。さらに判定部65は、実績データに基づき、現在の電圧及び実績データが、長期間にわたって、基準値Rf2に向かって緩やかに低下していれば、「経年劣化」と判定する。このような特定状態の種類の特定方法は、単なる一例であり、特に限定されない。制御回路6は、メモリに、特定状態の複数の種類の「変化の態様」にそれぞれ対応する変化パターンを予め記憶して、実績データと類似するメモリ内の変化パターンを見つけ出して、特定状態の種類を特定してもよい。 As an example, the determination unit 65 determines that the current voltage is "abnormal" if it is 0 (zero) or more and less than the reference value Rf1. Further, if the current voltage and the actual data continue for a predetermined period and have a reference value Rf1 or more and a reference value Rf2 or less, the determination unit 65 determines that the data is "dirty". Further, the determination unit 65 determines that the current voltage and the actual data are "aged deterioration" if the current voltage and the actual data gradually decrease toward the reference value Rf2 over a long period of time based on the actual data. The method for specifying the type of the specific state is merely an example, and is not particularly limited. The control circuit 6 stores in advance a change pattern corresponding to each of a plurality of types of "change modes" of the specific state in the memory, finds a change pattern in the memory similar to the actual data, and types the specific state. May be specified.
 毛切断装置1が特定状態にあると判定部65が判定すると、制御回路6は、例えば特定状態の種類を問わずに、通知部27よりユーザに通知する。ただし、制御回路6は、特定された特定状態の種類がユーザに区別できるように、発光色又は点灯状態を変化させることが好ましい。一例として、通知部27は、「異常」であれば赤色で連続点灯し、「汚れ」であれば橙色で点滅点灯し、「経年劣化」であれば、橙色で間欠点灯する。なお、通知部27は、正常時には、緑色で連続点灯する。通知部27は、表示灯により特定状態に関する通知を行うことに限定されない。通知部27は、表示灯の代わりに又は加えて、例えば、スピーカを備えていれば、音声出力により通知してもよいし、液晶ディスプレイを備えていれば、画像表示により通知してもよい。 When the determination unit 65 determines that the hair cutting device 1 is in a specific state, the control circuit 6 notifies the user from the notification unit 27, for example, regardless of the type of the specific state. However, it is preferable that the control circuit 6 changes the emission color or the lighting state so that the type of the specified specific state can be distinguished by the user. As an example, the notification unit 27 is continuously lit in red if it is "abnormal", blinks in orange if it is "dirty", and intermittently lit in orange if it is "aged". The notification unit 27 is normally lit continuously in green. The notification unit 27 is not limited to notifying the specific state by the indicator light. The notification unit 27 may notify by voice output if it is provided with a speaker, or may be notified by image display if it is provided with a liquid crystal display, in place of or in addition to the indicator light.
 ただし、本実施形態の判定部65は、毛切断装置1が「異常」(所定の種類)状態にあると判定すると、上述した通知部27からのユーザ通知だけでなく、制限部66が、光出力を制限する。制限部66は、例えば光源21が駆動中に突然「異常」が発生した場合には、自動的に光源21の駆動を停止させる。つまり、制限部66は、駆動部64に対して、光源21への電力供給を自動的に停止させる。 However, when the determination unit 65 of the present embodiment determines that the hair cutting device 1 is in an "abnormal" (predetermined type) state, not only the user notification from the notification unit 27 described above but also the restriction unit 66 emits light. Limit output. For example, when an "abnormality" suddenly occurs while the light source 21 is being driven, the limiting unit 66 automatically stops the driving of the light source 21. That is, the limiting unit 66 automatically stops the power supply to the light source 21 to the driving unit 64.
 また一度「異常」が発生した場合には、「異常」が解消されない限り、制限部66は、光源21の駆動を開始させない。つまり、「異常」が発生した場合には、毛切断装置1は、ユーザにこれ以上毛切断装置1の使用を許可させないようにする。 Once an "abnormality" occurs, the limiting unit 66 does not start driving the light source 21 unless the "abnormality" is resolved. That is, when an "abnormality" occurs, the hair cutting device 1 prevents the user from further permitting the use of the hair cutting device 1.
 「光出力の制限」は、光源21の駆動の停止に限定されず、制限部66は、「異常」が発生した場合には、例えば出力調整部63に光源21の出力の大きさ(パワー密度)を下げさせてもよい。また「光出力の制限」は、「異常」だけでなく、「汚れ」又は「経年劣化」にも適用されてもよい。 The "limitation of light output" is not limited to the stop of driving the light source 21, and the limiting unit 66 determines the output magnitude (power density) of the light source 21 to, for example, the output adjusting unit 63 when an "abnormality" occurs. ) May be lowered. Further, the "limitation of light output" may be applied not only to "abnormality" but also to "dirt" or "aging deterioration".
 [動作例1]
 次に、上述した制御回路6を備えた毛切断装置1の動作例1について、図11を参照して説明する。図11は、毛切断装置1の動作モード(第1モード及び第2モード)の切り替えに関する動作例を示すフローチャートである。
[Operation example 1]
Next, operation example 1 of the hair cutting device 1 provided with the above-mentioned control circuit 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an operation example relating to switching of the operation modes (first mode and second mode) of the hair cutting device 1.
 毛切断装置1は、まず、光源21の動作モードが第1モードであるか否かの判定を行う(ST1)。このとき、動作モードが第1モードであれば(ST1:Yes)、毛切断装置1は、発光期間T1の時間長さを1万分の1秒以下に設定して、駆動部64にて光源21を駆動する(ST2)。一方、動作モードが第1モードでなければ(ST1:No)、毛切断装置1は、処理ST2をスキップして処理ST3に移行する。 The hair cutting device 1 first determines whether or not the operation mode of the light source 21 is the first mode (ST1). At this time, if the operation mode is the first mode (ST1: Yes), the hair cutting device 1 sets the time length of the light emitting period T1 to 1 / 10,000 second or less, and the light source 21 is set by the drive unit 64. (ST2). On the other hand, if the operation mode is not the first mode (ST1: No), the hair cutting device 1 skips the process ST2 and shifts to the process ST3.
 処理ST3では、毛切断装置1は、光源21の動作モードが第2モードであるか否かの判定を行う。このとき、動作モードが第2モードであれば(ST3:Yes)、毛切断装置1は、発光期間T1の時間長さを100分の1秒以上に設定して、駆動部64にて光源21を駆動する(ST4)。一方、動作モードが第2モードでなければ(ST3:No)、毛切断装置1は、処理ST4をスキップして処理を終了する。 In the process ST3, the hair cutting device 1 determines whether or not the operation mode of the light source 21 is the second mode. At this time, if the operation mode is the second mode (ST3: Yes), the hair cutting device 1 sets the time length of the light emitting period T1 to 1/100 second or more, and the light source 21 is set by the drive unit 64. (ST4). On the other hand, if the operation mode is not the second mode (ST3: No), the hair cutting device 1 skips the process ST4 and ends the process.
 毛切断装置1は、上記処理ST1~ST4を繰り返し実行する。図11に示すフローチャートは、毛切断装置1の動作の一例に過ぎず、例えば、処理の順序が適宜入れ替わってもよいし、適宜、処理が追加又は省略されてもよい。 The hair cutting device 1 repeatedly executes the above processes ST1 to ST4. The flowchart shown in FIG. 11 is merely an example of the operation of the hair cutting device 1, and for example, the order of processing may be appropriately changed, and processing may be added or omitted as appropriate.
 [動作例2]
 次に、上述した制御回路6を備えた毛切断装置1の動作例2について、図12を参照して説明する。図12は、毛切断装置1の診断処理に関する動作例を示すフローチャートである。ここでは一例として、ユーザが毛切断装置1の使用中に「異常」が発生した場合について説明する。
[Operation example 2]
Next, operation example 2 of the hair cutting device 1 provided with the above-mentioned control circuit 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing an operation example related to the diagnostic process of the hair cutting device 1. Here, as an example, a case where an "abnormality" occurs while the user is using the hair cutting device 1 will be described.
 毛切断装置1は、まず、操作部26を通じて主電源をオンにする操作を受け付ける(ST11)。毛切断装置1は、スタンバイ状態となり、判定処理を実行して、センサ部S1からの検知信号を監視する(ST12)。 The hair cutting device 1 first accepts an operation of turning on the main power through the operation unit 26 (ST11). The hair cutting device 1 enters the standby state, executes a determination process, and monitors the detection signal from the sensor unit S1 (ST12).
 毛切断装置1は、センサ部S1からの検知信号に基づき、皮膚92が接触状態となったと判定すると(ST13:Yes)、光源21の駆動を開始する(ST14:光放出ステップ)。なお、毛切断装置1は、皮膚92が接触状態となるまで(ST13:No)、光源21の駆動を開始することなくスタンバイ状態を継続する。 When the hair cutting device 1 determines that the skin 92 is in contact with the skin 92 based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1 (ST13: Yes), the hair cutting device 1 starts driving the light source 21 (ST14: light emission step). The hair cutting device 1 continues the standby state without starting the driving of the light source 21 until the skin 92 is in the contact state (ST13: No).
 毛切断装置1は、光源21の駆動が開始されると、診断処理を実行して、検知部D1からの検知信号を監視する(ST15:検知ステップ)。毛切断装置1は、センサ部S1からの検知信号に基づき、皮膚92が非接触状態となると(ST16:Yes)、光源21の駆動を停止して(ST17)、診断処理を終える。 When the driving of the light source 21 is started, the hair cutting device 1 executes a diagnostic process and monitors the detection signal from the detection unit D1 (ST15: detection step). Based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1, the hair cutting device 1 stops driving the light source 21 (ST17) when the skin 92 is in a non-contact state (ST16: Yes), and ends the diagnostic process.
 毛切断装置1は、皮膚92が接触状態にある場合に(ST16:No)、検知部D1からの検知信号に基づき、「異常」が発生したと判定すると(ST18:Yes)、光源21の駆動を緊急停止する(ST19)。さらに毛切断装置1は、通知部27を通じて「異常」の発生に関するユーザ通知を実行し(ST20)、診断処理を終える。以降、毛切断装置1は、「異常」が解消されるまで、光源21の駆動開始を禁止する。なお、「異常」が発生していなければ(ST18:No)、皮膚92が非接触状態となるまで、診断処理を継続する。 When the hair cutting device 1 determines that an "abnormality" has occurred based on the detection signal from the detection unit D1 when the skin 92 is in contact (ST16: No) (ST18: Yes), the hair cutting device 1 drives the light source 21. Emergency stop (ST19). Further, the hair cutting device 1 executes a user notification regarding the occurrence of an "abnormality" through the notification unit 27 (ST20), and ends the diagnostic process. After that, the hair cutting device 1 prohibits the start of driving the light source 21 until the "abnormality" is resolved. If no "abnormality" has occurred (ST18: No), the diagnostic process is continued until the skin 92 is in a non-contact state.
 図12に示すフローチャートは、毛切断装置1の動作の一例に過ぎず、例えば、処理の順序が適宜入れ替わってもよいし、適宜、処理が追加又は省略されてもよい。特にセンサ部S1を利用した接触状態の判定処理は、本開示の毛切断装置1にとって必須ではなく、省略されてもよい。 The flowchart shown in FIG. 12 is merely an example of the operation of the hair cutting device 1, and for example, the order of processing may be appropriately changed, and processing may be added or omitted as appropriate. In particular, the contact state determination process using the sensor unit S1 is not essential for the hair cutting device 1 of the present disclosure, and may be omitted.
 (3)作用
 次に、本実施形態に係る毛切断装置1にて期待し得る作用について説明する。
(3) Action Next, the action that can be expected in the hair cutting device 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.
 まず、毛切断装置1の基本的な機能である毛91の切断については、「(2.4)使用例」の欄で説明したようなメカニズムにより実現される。 First, the cutting of the hair 91, which is the basic function of the hair cutting device 1, is realized by the mechanism described in the column of "(2.4) Usage example".
 本実施形態では、光放出部40の第1放出光Op1は、400nm以上700nm以下の波長を持つので、例えば、毛91に含まれるケラチン及び水等の発色団に吸収されやすい。また少なくとも毛91の切断時において、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は50kW/cm以上である。そのため、光放出部40から毛91に放出する第1放出光Op1においても、毛91を切断するのに十分なパワー密度(50kW/cm以上)を持ち得る。 In the present embodiment, since the first emitted light Op1 of the light emitting unit 40 has a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less, it is easily absorbed by a chromophore such as keratin and water contained in the hair 91, for example. Further, at least when the hair 91 is cut, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 is 50 kW / cm 2 or more. Therefore, even the first emitted light Op1 emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91 may have a sufficient power density (50 kW / cm 2 or more) for cutting the hair 91.
 次に毛切断装置1の副次的な機能である皮膚92への作用について説明する。本実施形態では、光放出部40の第2放出光Op2は、400nm以上700nm以下の波長を持つので、殺菌又は活性化等の皮膚92への作用も期待できるようになる。つまり、皮膚92に放出する第2放出光Op2が、例えば、400nm以上450nm以下の波長を持つ場合、皮膚92に存在するアクネ菌等に対する殺菌作用が期待できる。特に、図8A及び図8Bに例示したように、皮膚92における毛91の周辺に、ニキビ等の隆起部922が存在する場合には、隆起部922に第2放出光Op2が直接的に放出し、より効果的な殺菌作用等を期待できる。さらに、第2放出光Op2が、例えば、450nm以上700nm以下の波長を持つ場合、皮膚92の活性化作用が期待できる。つまり、第2放出光Op2が皮膚92に放出されることによって、皮膚92が活性化され、肌質の改善等のいわゆる「美肌効果」といった作用が期待できる。 Next, the action on the skin 92, which is a secondary function of the hair cutting device 1, will be described. In the present embodiment, the second emitted light Op2 of the light emitting unit 40 has a wavelength of 400 nm or more and 700 nm or less, so that an action on the skin 92 such as sterilization or activation can be expected. That is, when the second emitted light Op2 emitted to the skin 92 has a wavelength of, for example, 400 nm or more and 450 nm or less, a bactericidal action against P. acnes and the like present on the skin 92 can be expected. In particular, as illustrated in FIGS. 8A and 8B, when a raised portion 922 such as acne is present around the hair 91 in the skin 92, the second emitted light Op2 is directly emitted to the raised portion 922. , More effective bactericidal action can be expected. Further, when the second emitted light Op2 has a wavelength of, for example, 450 nm or more and 700 nm or less, an activating action of the skin 92 can be expected. That is, when the second emitted light Op2 is emitted to the skin 92, the skin 92 is activated, and an action such as a so-called "skin-beautifying effect" such as improvement of the skin quality can be expected.
 また本実施形態では、「(2.3.8)検知部及び検知領域」の欄で説明したように検知部D1及び検知領域D2が設けられているため、例えば検知部D1の検知結果を利用することができる。例えば、「(2.6)制御回路」の欄で説明したように、異常、経年劣化、又は汚れ等の発生を判定して、光源21の自動停止、及びユーザ通知等を行える。結果的に、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置1を提供できる、という利点がある。 Further, in the present embodiment, since the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2 are provided as described in the column of "(2.3.8) Detection unit and detection area", for example, the detection result of the detection unit D1 is used. can do. For example, as described in the column of "(2.6) Control circuit", it is possible to determine the occurrence of abnormality, aging deterioration, dirt, etc., automatically stop the light source 21, and notify the user. As a result, there is an advantage that the hair cutting device 1 having improved reliability regarding light output can be provided.
 また検知領域D2は、カバー30内における、光導波路4内を伝達する光の伝達方向A2の伝達先となる一端側の空間に配置されるため、検知領域D2が、毛91を切断する光の放出に影響を与えてしまう可能性を低減できる。 Further, since the detection region D2 is arranged in the space on one end side of the cover 30 which is the transmission destination of the light transmission direction A2 transmitted in the optical waveguide 4, the detection region D2 is the light that cuts the hair 91. The possibility of affecting the release can be reduced.
 また対象光OB1は、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に向かう光のうちの一部の光であるため、例えば、検知領域D2に向かう光を直接検知する場合に比べて、対象光OB1の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。つまり、検知部D1にとっては、光導波路4の終端面40Bから導出される光強度は強すぎる可能性があり、制御回路6は、汚れや経年劣化等の特定状態の種類によっては、特定状態に伴う光強度の変化を見逃す可能性がある。この点で、対象光OB1が、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に向かう光のうちの一部の光であるため、輝度飽和の抑制を図れる。 Further, since the target light OB1 is a part of the light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and heading toward the detection region D2, the target light is compared with the case where the light heading toward the detection region D2 is directly detected, for example. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the saturation of the brightness of the OB1. That is, for the detection unit D1, the light intensity derived from the end surface 40B of the optical waveguide 4 may be too strong, and the control circuit 6 may be in a specific state depending on the type of a specific state such as dirt or deterioration over time. The accompanying change in light intensity may be overlooked. At this point, since the target light OB1 is a part of the light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and heading toward the detection region D2, the luminance saturation can be suppressed.
 また本実施形態では、判定部65が、特定状態の種類の特定も行えるため、光出力に関する信頼性が更に向上さ得る。特に制限部66が設けられていることで、所定の種類に応じた光出力の制限を行えるようになり、光出力に関する信頼性が更に向上さ得る。 Further, in the present embodiment, since the determination unit 65 can also specify the type of the specific state, the reliability regarding the light output can be further improved. In particular, by providing the limiting unit 66, it becomes possible to limit the optical output according to a predetermined type, and the reliability of the optical output can be further improved.
 (4)変形例
 本実施形態は、本開示の様々な実施形態の一つに過ぎない。本実施形態は、本開示の目的を達成できれば、設計等に応じて種々の変更が可能である。また、本開示で参照する図面は、いずれも模式的な図であり、図中の各構成要素の大きさ及び厚さそれぞれの比が、必ずしも実際の寸法比を反映しているとは限らない。
(4) Modifications This embodiment is only one of the various embodiments of the present disclosure. The present embodiment can be variously modified according to the design and the like as long as the object of the present disclosure can be achieved. Further, the drawings referred to in the present disclosure are all schematic views, and the ratio of the size and the thickness of each component in the drawing does not necessarily reflect the actual dimensional ratio. ..
 また上記実施形態に係る毛切断装置1(特に制御回路6)と同様の機能は、毛切断方法、コンピュータプログラム、又はコンピュータプログラムを記録した非一時的記録媒体等で具現化されてもよい。以下、上記実施形態の変形例を列挙する。以下に説明する変形例は、適宜組み合わせて適用可能である。 Further, the same function as the hair cutting device 1 (particularly the control circuit 6) according to the above embodiment may be embodied by a hair cutting method, a computer program, a non-temporary recording medium on which a computer program is recorded, or the like. Hereinafter, variations of the above embodiment are listed. The modifications described below can be applied in combination as appropriate.
 本開示における毛切断装置1(特に制御回路6)は、コンピュータシステムを含んでいる。コンピュータシステムは、ハードウェアとしてのプロセッサ及びメモリを主構成とする。コンピュータシステムのメモリに記録されたプログラムをプロセッサが実行することによって、本開示における制御回路6としての機能が実現される。プログラムは、コンピュータシステムのメモリに予め記録されてもよく、電気通信回線を通じて提供されてもよく、コンピュータシステムで読み取り可能なメモリカード、光学ディスク、ハードディスクドライブ等の非一時的記録媒体に記録されて提供されてもよい。コンピュータシステムのプロセッサは、半導体集積回路(IC)又は大規模集積回路(LSI)を含む1または複数の電子回路で構成される。ここでいうIC又はLSI等の集積回路は、集積の度合いによって呼び方が異なっており、システムLSI、VLSI(Very Large Scale Integration)、又はULSI(Ultra Large Scale Integration)と呼ばれる集積回路を含む。 The hair cutting device 1 (particularly the control circuit 6) in the present disclosure includes a computer system. The computer system mainly consists of a processor and a memory as hardware. The function as the control circuit 6 in the present disclosure is realized by the processor executing the program recorded in the memory of the computer system. The program may be pre-recorded in the memory of the computer system, may be provided through a telecommunications line, and may be recorded on a non-temporary recording medium such as a memory card, optical disk, hard disk drive, etc. that can be read by the computer system. May be provided. The processor of a computer system is composed of one or more electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit (IC) or a large scale integrated circuit (LSI). The integrated circuit such as IC or LSI referred to here has a different name depending on the degree of integration, and includes an integrated circuit called a system LSI, VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration), or ULSI (Ultra Large Scale Integration).
 さらに、LSIの製造後にプログラムされる、FPGA(Field-Programmable Gate Array)、又はLSI内部の接合関係の再構成若しくはLSI内部の回路区画の再構成が可能な論理デバイスについても、プロセッサとして採用することができる。複数の電子回路は、1つのチップに集約されていてもよいし、複数のチップに分散して設けられていてもよい。複数のチップは、1つの装置に集約されていてもよいし、複数の装置に分散して設けられていてもよい。ここでいうコンピュータシステムは、1以上のプロセッサ及び1以上のメモリを有するマイクロコントローラを含む。したがって、マイクロコントローラについても、半導体集積回路又は大規模集積回路を含む1または複数の電子回路で構成される。 Further, an FPGA (Field-Programmable Gate Array) programmed after the LSI is manufactured, or a logic device capable of reconfiguring the junction relationship inside the LSI or reconfiguring the circuit partition inside the LSI should also be adopted as a processor. Can be done. A plurality of electronic circuits may be integrated on one chip, or may be distributed on a plurality of chips. A plurality of chips may be integrated in one device, or may be distributed in a plurality of devices. The computer system referred to here includes a microcontroller having one or more processors and one or more memories. Therefore, the microprocessor is also composed of one or a plurality of electronic circuits including a semiconductor integrated circuit or a large-scale integrated circuit.
 また、毛切断装置1における複数の機能が、1つのハウジング内に集約されていることは必須の構成ではない。例えば、毛切断装置1の構成要素は、複数のハウジングに分散して設けられていてもよい。反対に、毛切断装置1における複数の機能が、1つのハウジング内に集約されてもよい。さらに、毛切断装置1の少なくとも一部の機能、例えば、毛切断装置1の一部の機能がクラウド(クラウドコンピューティング)等によって実現されてもよい。 Further, it is not an essential configuration that a plurality of functions of the hair cutting device 1 are integrated in one housing. For example, the components of the hair cutting device 1 may be dispersedly provided in a plurality of housings. On the contrary, a plurality of functions in the hair cutting device 1 may be integrated in one housing. Further, at least a part of the functions of the hair cutting device 1, for example, a part of the functions of the hair cutting device 1 may be realized by a cloud (cloud computing) or the like.
 (4.1)第1変形例
 本実施形態の第1変形例に係る毛切断装置1Aについて、図13を参照して説明する。ただし、以下の第1変形例について、毛切断装置1と実質的に共通する構成要素については同じ参照符号を付して、その説明を適宜省略する場合がある。
(4.1) First Modification Example The hair cutting device 1A according to the first modification of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. However, with respect to the following first modification, the same reference numerals may be given to the components substantially common to the hair cutting device 1, and the description thereof may be omitted as appropriate.
 図13に示すように、毛切断装置1Aは、全体としての外観が電気シェーバに近い形状である。毛切断装置1Aの装置本体2は、細長い筒状であり、装置本体2の先端に毛切断部材3(ヘッド)が装着されている。特に毛切断装置1Aは、毛切断部材3(ヘッド)の長手方向、及び光導波路4の光軸C1が、装置本体2の長手方向と直交する点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 As shown in FIG. 13, the hair cutting device 1A has a shape similar to that of an electric shaver as a whole. The device main body 2 of the hair cutting device 1A has an elongated tubular shape, and a hair cutting member 3 (head) is attached to the tip of the device main body 2. In particular, the hair cutting device 1A is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that the longitudinal direction of the hair cutting member 3 (head) and the optical axis C1 of the optical waveguide 4 are orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the apparatus main body 2.
 毛切断装置1Aは、装置本体2のケース20内の光学系22から出射される光を、フェルール71内の受光面40Aまで導くように反射する1又は複数のミラーを、毛切断部材3又は装置本体2の内部に備えることが好ましい。 The hair cutting device 1A has one or a plurality of mirrors that reflect light emitted from the optical system 22 in the case 20 of the device main body 2 so as to be guided to the light receiving surface 40A in the ferrule 71, and the hair cutting member 3 or the device. It is preferable to provide it inside the main body 2.
 このように構成された毛切断装置1Aにおいても、検知部D1、検知領域D2、及び拡散部Y1を備えている。したがって、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置1Aを提供できる。 The hair cutting device 1A configured as described above also includes a detection unit D1, a detection region D2, and a diffusion unit Y1. Therefore, it is possible to provide the hair cutting device 1A having improved reliability regarding light output.
 なお、本開示における「毛切断装置」の外観形状は、毛切断装置1、及び毛切断装置1Aの形状に限定されず、他にも毛切断部材3(ヘッド)の長手方向の長さが、装置本体2の幅よりも大きいT字形状の外観でもよい。また「毛切断装置」の外観形状は、Y字形状、L字形状、又はカード型形状の外観でもよい。 The external shape of the "hair cutting device" in the present disclosure is not limited to the shapes of the hair cutting device 1 and the hair cutting device 1A, and the length of the hair cutting member 3 (head) in the longitudinal direction is also included. It may have a T-shaped appearance that is larger than the width of the device main body 2. Further, the appearance shape of the "hair cutting device" may be a Y-shaped shape, an L-shaped shape, or a card-shaped appearance.
 (4.2)第2変形例
 本実施形態の第2変形例に係る毛切断装置1B~1Eについて、図14A~図14Dを参照して説明する。ただし、以下の第2変形例について、毛切断装置1と実質的に共通する構成要素については同じ参照符号を付して、その説明を適宜省略する場合がある。図14A~図14Dは、いずれも検知領域D2の要部拡大図である。
(4.2) Second Modified Example The hair cutting devices 1B to 1E according to the second modified example of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 14A to 14D. However, with respect to the following second modification, the same reference numerals may be given to the components substantially common to the hair cutting device 1, and the description thereof may be omitted as appropriate. 14A to 14D are all enlarged views of the main part of the detection area D2.
 毛切断装置1Bは、図14Aに示すように、対象光OB1が全反射せずに光導波路4から漏れ出た漏れ光を含む点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 As shown in FIG. 14A, the hair cutting device 1B is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that the target light OB1 includes the leaked light leaked from the optical waveguide 4 without being totally reflected.
 具体的には、毛切断装置1Bは、毛切断装置1と同様に、検知部D1、及び検知領域D2を備えている。ただし、毛切断装置1Bは、毛切断装置1の拡散部Y1の代わりにビームダンプ(Beam Dump)D3を備えている点、並びに、光導波路4の先端部付近が検知領域D2内で湾曲している点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 Specifically, the hair cutting device 1B includes a detection unit D1 and a detection area D2, similarly to the hair cutting device 1. However, the hair cutting device 1B is provided with a beam dump D3 instead of the diffusion portion Y1 of the hair cutting device 1, and the vicinity of the tip portion of the optical waveguide 4 is curved in the detection region D2. It differs from the hair cutting device 1 in that it is present.
 光導波路4は、先端部付近に、伝達方向A2に対して、例えばZ軸の正方向に湾曲する湾曲部45を有している。湾曲部45は、検知領域D2内に配置される。光導波路4のコア部41内を伝達方向A2に沿って進む光が湾曲部45にてクラッド部42に入射する入射角度が、臨界角より小さくなって全反射できなくなるように、湾曲部45の曲率半径が設定されている。 The optical waveguide 4 has a curved portion 45 that curves in the positive direction of the Z axis, for example, with respect to the transmission direction A2 in the vicinity of the tip portion. The curved portion 45 is arranged in the detection area D2. The curved portion 45 is provided so that the incident angle at which the light traveling along the transmission direction A2 in the core portion 41 of the optical waveguide 4 is incident on the clad portion 42 at the curved portion 45 becomes smaller than the critical angle and cannot be totally reflected. The radius of curvature is set.
 ビームダンプD3は、湾曲部45より先にある光導波路4の終端面40Bから導出される光を吸収するように構成される。光導波路4の先端部は、ビームダンプD3に接続されている。ビームダンプD3は、検知領域D2内に配置される。ビームダンプD3は、検知領域D2内において、例えば、光導波路4の中心軸よりもZ軸の正の側に配置される。 The beam dump D3 is configured to absorb the light derived from the end surface 40B of the optical waveguide 4 ahead of the curved portion 45. The tip of the optical waveguide 4 is connected to the beam dump D3. The beam dump D3 is arranged in the detection area D2. The beam dump D3 is arranged in the detection region D2, for example, on the positive side of the Z axis with respect to the central axis of the optical waveguide 4.
 検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、対象光OB1を受光可能な位置に配置される。すなわち、検知部D1は、湾曲部45から全反射せずに光導波路4から漏れ出た漏れ光を含む対象光OB1を受光するように配置される。検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、例えば、光導波路4の中心軸よりもZ軸の負の側に配置される。 The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2 at a position where the target light OB1 can be received. That is, the detection unit D1 is arranged so as to receive the target light OB1 including the leaked light leaked from the optical waveguide 4 without being totally reflected from the curved portion 45. The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection region D2, for example, on the negative side of the Z axis with respect to the central axis of the optical waveguide 4.
 上述した毛切断装置1Bの構成においても、検知部D1及び検知領域D2が設けられているため、例えば検知部D1の検知結果を利用することができる。したがって、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置1Bを提供できる。特に毛切断装置1Bでは、漏れ光を利用するため、比較的簡素な構成で、対象光OB1の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 Even in the configuration of the hair cutting device 1B described above, since the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2 are provided, for example, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used. Therefore, it is possible to provide the hair cutting device 1B having improved reliability regarding light output. In particular, since the hair cutting device 1B uses leaked light, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1 with a relatively simple configuration.
 なお、毛切断装置1Bの別の例として、湾曲部45の代わりに、コア部41やクラッド部42の屈折率よりも屈折率の大きい透光性を有する部材を、検知領域D2内において、光導波路4の外周面に接触するように配置させることで、漏れ光を発生させてもよい。 As another example of the hair cutting device 1B, instead of the curved portion 45, a member having a translucency having a refractive index larger than that of the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 is optical-guided in the detection region D2. Leakage light may be generated by arranging the waveguide 4 so as to be in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the waveguide 4.
 毛切断装置1Cは、図14Bに示すように、対象光OB1が拡散部Y2で拡散された拡散光を含む点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 As shown in FIG. 14B, the hair cutting device 1C is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that the target light OB1 contains the diffused light diffused by the diffusing portion Y2.
 具体的には、毛切断装置1Cは、毛切断装置1と同様に、検知部D1、及び検知領域D2を備えている。ただし、毛切断装置1Cは、毛切断装置1の、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に進入した光を「拡散反射」させる拡散部Y1の代わりに、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に進入した光を「拡散透過」させる拡散部Y2を備えている点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 Specifically, the hair cutting device 1C includes a detection unit D1 and a detection area D2, similarly to the hair cutting device 1. However, the hair cutting device 1C transmits the light in the optical waveguide 4 instead of the diffuser Y1 that "diffuses and reflects" the light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and entering the detection region D2 of the hair cutting device 1. It differs from the hair cutting device 1 in that it includes a diffusion unit Y2 that "diffuses and transmits" the light that has entered the detection region D2.
 拡散部Y2は、光(入射光)を様々な方向へ出射させる拡散面Y20を有した部材から構成される。拡散部Y2は、検知領域D2内に配置される。拡散部Y2は、図14Bの例では、その厚み方向がX軸に平行となるように配置された板状の部材から構成されるが、拡散部Y2の形状は特に限定されない。拡散面Y20は、拡散部Y2の母材の表面に例えば微細な凹凸構造を設けることで形成され得る。拡散面Y20の形成方法は特に限定されない。拡散部Y2は、例えば、磨りガラスから構成されてもよい。 The diffusion unit Y2 is composed of a member having a diffusion surface Y20 that emits light (incident light) in various directions. The diffusion unit Y2 is arranged in the detection area D2. In the example of FIG. 14B, the diffusion portion Y2 is composed of plate-shaped members arranged so that the thickness direction thereof is parallel to the X axis, but the shape of the diffusion portion Y2 is not particularly limited. The diffusion surface Y20 can be formed by, for example, providing a fine uneven structure on the surface of the base material of the diffusion portion Y2. The method of forming the diffusion surface Y20 is not particularly limited. The diffuser Y2 may be made of frosted glass, for example.
 拡散面Y20は、X軸の正の側を向くように配置される。拡散部Y2の拡散面Y20の反対側の面(入射面Y21)は、光導波路4の先端部の終端面40Bと対向する。光導波路4の光軸C1の方向は、入射面Y21と直交する。光導波路4内を伝達して終端面40Bから導出された直接的な光が、拡散部Y2の入射面Y21に入射し、さらに拡散部Y2内を透過する光は、拡散面Y20から拡散される。 The diffusion surface Y20 is arranged so as to face the positive side of the X axis. The surface of the diffusion portion Y2 on the opposite side of the diffusion surface Y20 (incident surface Y21) faces the end surface 40B at the tip of the optical waveguide 4. The direction of the optical axis C1 of the optical waveguide 4 is orthogonal to the incident surface Y21. The direct light transmitted through the optical wave guide 4 and derived from the terminal surface 40B is incident on the incident surface Y21 of the diffusing portion Y2, and the light transmitted through the diffusing portion Y2 is further diffused from the diffusing surface Y20. ..
 検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、対象光OB1を受光可能な位置に配置される。すなわち、検知部D1は、拡散面Y20から拡散される光を受光するように配置される。検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、例えば、その厚み方向がX軸に平行となるように、拡散面Y20と対向して配置される。つまり、光導波路4から見て、検知部D1は、拡散部Y2の裏側に配置される。 The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2 at a position where the target light OB1 can be received. That is, the detection unit D1 is arranged so as to receive the light diffused from the diffusion surface Y20. The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection region D2 so as to face the diffusion surface Y20 so that its thickness direction is parallel to the X axis, for example. That is, the detection unit D1 is arranged behind the diffusion unit Y2 when viewed from the optical waveguide 4.
 上述した毛切断装置1Cの構成においても、検知部D1及び検知領域D2が設けられているため、例えば検知部D1の検知結果を利用することができる。したがって、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置1Cを提供できる。特に毛切断装置1Cでは、拡散透過された光を利用するため、比較的簡素な構成で、対象光OB1の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 Even in the configuration of the hair cutting device 1C described above, since the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2 are provided, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used, for example. Therefore, it is possible to provide the hair cutting device 1C having improved reliability regarding light output. In particular, since the hair cutting device 1C uses the diffused and transmitted light, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1 with a relatively simple configuration.
 毛切断装置1Dは、図14Cに示すように、鏡面反射させる反射部Y3を備える点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 As shown in FIG. 14C, the hair cutting device 1D differs from the hair cutting device 1 in that it includes a reflecting portion Y3 that reflects specularly.
 具体的には、毛切断装置1Dは、毛切断装置1と同様に、検知部D1、及び検知領域D2を備えている。ただし、毛切断装置1Dは、毛切断装置1の拡散部Y1の代わりに、反射部Y3を備えている点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 Specifically, the hair cutting device 1D includes a detection unit D1 and a detection area D2, similarly to the hair cutting device 1. However, the hair cutting device 1D is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that the hair cutting device 1 is provided with the reflecting portion Y3 instead of the diffusing portion Y1 of the hair cutting device 1.
 反射部Y3は、光(入射光)を鏡面反射するミラーから構成される。反射部Y3は、検知領域D2内に配置される。反射部Y3は、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に進入した光を反射する。対象光OB1は、反射部Y3で反射された反射光を含む。 The reflecting unit Y3 is composed of a mirror that mirror-reflects light (incident light). The reflection unit Y3 is arranged in the detection area D2. The reflection unit Y3 reflects the light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and entering the detection region D2. The target light OB1 includes the reflected light reflected by the reflecting unit Y3.
 反射部Y3は、反射面Y30を有している。反射部Y3は、反射面Y30が光導波路4の終端面40Bと対向するように配置される。ただし、反射部Y3は、反射面Y30が光軸C1の方向に対して傾斜するように配置される。詳細には、反射面Y30は、反射面Y30の直交方向が光軸C1の方向に対して角度θ1を成すように傾斜している。したがって、反射部Y3は、光導波路4内を伝達して終端面40Bから導出された直接的な光を、反射面Y30で鏡面反射させる。すなわち、反射面Y30で反射した反射光は、その光軸C2の方向が反射面Y30の直交方向と角度θ2を成すように反射する。この角度θ2は、角度θ1と等しい。 The reflecting portion Y3 has a reflecting surface Y30. The reflecting portion Y3 is arranged so that the reflecting surface Y30 faces the end surface 40B of the optical waveguide 4. However, the reflecting portion Y3 is arranged so that the reflecting surface Y30 is inclined with respect to the direction of the optical axis C1. Specifically, the reflective surface Y30 is inclined so that the orthogonal direction of the reflective surface Y30 forms an angle θ1 with respect to the direction of the optical axis C1. Therefore, the reflecting unit Y3 mirror-reflects the direct light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and derived from the terminal surface 40B by the reflecting surface Y30. That is, the reflected light reflected by the reflecting surface Y30 is reflected so that the direction of the optical axis C2 forms an angle θ2 with the orthogonal direction of the reflecting surface Y30. This angle θ2 is equal to the angle θ1.
 検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、対象光OB1を受光可能な位置に配置される。すなわち、検知部D1は、反射面Y30で反射した反射光を受光するように配置される。検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、例えば、反射面Y30と対向するように、光導波路4の中心軸よりもZ軸の負の側に配置される。 The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2 at a position where the target light OB1 can be received. That is, the detection unit D1 is arranged so as to receive the reflected light reflected by the reflection surface Y30. The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection region D2 on the negative side of the Z axis with respect to the central axis of the optical waveguide 4, for example, so as to face the reflection surface Y30.
 上述した毛切断装置1Dの構成においても、検知部D1及び検知領域D2が設けられているため、例えば検知部D1の検知結果を利用することができる。したがって、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置1Dを提供できる。また対象光OB1の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 Even in the configuration of the hair cutting device 1D described above, since the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2 are provided, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used, for example. Therefore, it is possible to provide a hair cutting device 1D having improved reliability regarding light output. Further, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1.
 毛切断装置1Dでは、検知部D1は、受光面D10が、反射面Y30で反射した反射光の光軸C2の方向からずれて配置されることが好ましい。特に受光面D10は、反射光の光軸C2の方向と交差しないことが好ましい。この場合、反射面Y30で反射した反射光を利用する一方で、光軸C2に沿った光強度の大きい反射光が対象光OB1に含まれにくくなり、対象光OB1の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を更に低減できる。 In the hair cutting device 1D, it is preferable that the detection unit D1 is arranged so that the light receiving surface D10 is displaced from the direction of the optical axis C2 of the reflected light reflected by the reflecting surface Y30. In particular, it is preferable that the light receiving surface D10 does not intersect the direction of the optical axis C2 of the reflected light. In this case, while the reflected light reflected by the reflecting surface Y30 is used, the reflected light having a high light intensity along the optical axis C2 is less likely to be included in the target light OB1, and the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1. The possibility of doing so can be further reduced.
 毛切断装置1Dの別の例として、反射部Y3は、ハーフミラーから構成されてもよい。この場合、検知部D1は、上述した拡散部Y2と同様に、光導波路4から見て、反射部Y3の裏側に配置されてもよい。 As another example of the hair cutting device 1D, the reflecting portion Y3 may be composed of a half mirror. In this case, the detection unit D1 may be arranged on the back side of the reflection unit Y3 when viewed from the optical waveguide 4, similarly to the diffusion unit Y2 described above.
 毛切断装置1Eは、図14Dに示すように、変換部Y4を備える点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 As shown in FIG. 14D, the hair cutting device 1E is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that it includes a conversion unit Y4.
 具体的には、毛切断装置1Eは、毛切断装置1と同様に、検知部D1、及び検知領域D2を備えている。ただし、毛切断装置1Eは、毛切断装置1の拡散部Y1の代わりに、変換部Y4を備えている点で、毛切断装置1と相違する。 Specifically, the hair cutting device 1E includes a detection unit D1 and a detection area D2, similarly to the hair cutting device 1. However, the hair cutting device 1E is different from the hair cutting device 1 in that the conversion unit Y4 is provided instead of the diffusion unit Y1 of the hair cutting device 1.
 変換部Y4は、検知領域D2内に配置される。変換部Y4は、光導波路4内を伝達して検知領域D2に進入した光(励起光)により励起を引き起こして光を発生する蛍光体粒子Y40を含む。対象光OB1は、変換部Y4で発生した光を含む。 The conversion unit Y4 is arranged in the detection area D2. The conversion unit Y4 includes phosphor particles Y40 that generate light by inducing excitation by light (excitation light) transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and entering the detection region D2. The target light OB1 includes the light generated by the conversion unit Y4.
 具体的には、変換部Y4は、例えば、複数の蛍光体粒子Y40と、複数の蛍光体粒子Y40を封止する透光性を有した封止層とを含む、板状の波長変換部材から構成される。変換部Y4は、その厚み方向における両端面に、入射面Y41と出射面Y42とを有している。入射面Y41は、光導波路4の終端面40Bと対向する。光導波路4の光軸C1の方向は、入射面Y41及び出射面Y42の各々と直交する。 Specifically, the conversion unit Y4 is composed of, for example, a plate-shaped wavelength conversion member including a plurality of phosphor particles Y40 and a translucent sealing layer for sealing the plurality of phosphor particles Y40. It is composed. The conversion unit Y4 has an incident surface Y41 and an exit surface Y42 on both end surfaces in the thickness direction thereof. The incident surface Y41 faces the end surface 40B of the optical waveguide 4. The direction of the optical axis C1 of the optical waveguide 4 is orthogonal to each of the incident surface Y41 and the exit surface Y42.
 光導波路4内を伝達して終端面40Bから導出された直接的な光は、変換部Y4の入射面Y41に入射すると、蛍光体粒子Y40が、励起光を吸収して励起光の波長と異なる波長(例えば長波長)の光を発生させる。そして、その光は、変換部Y4の出射面Y42から出射する。また入射光のうち蛍光体粒子Y40に吸収されなかった光は、波長変換されずにそのまま変換部Y4の出射面Y42から出射する。 When the direct light transmitted through the optical waveguide 4 and derived from the end surface 40B is incident on the incident surface Y41 of the conversion unit Y4, the phosphor particles Y40 absorb the excitation light and differ from the wavelength of the excitation light. Generates light of wavelength (eg, long wavelength). Then, the light is emitted from the emission surface Y42 of the conversion unit Y4. Further, among the incident light, the light that is not absorbed by the phosphor particles Y40 is emitted as it is from the emission surface Y42 of the conversion unit Y4 without being wavelength-converted.
 検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、対象光OB1を受光可能な位置に配置される。すなわち、検知部D1は、変換部Y4の出射面Y42から出射した光を受光するように配置される。検知部D1は、検知領域D2内において、例えば、受光面D10が、出射面Y42と対向するように配置される。ここでは受光面D10は、光導波路4の光軸C1の方向と直交する。 The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2 at a position where the target light OB1 can be received. That is, the detection unit D1 is arranged so as to receive the light emitted from the emission surface Y42 of the conversion unit Y4. The detection unit D1 is arranged in the detection area D2 so that, for example, the light receiving surface D10 faces the exit surface Y42. Here, the light receiving surface D10 is orthogonal to the direction of the optical axis C1 of the optical waveguide 4.
 上述した毛切断装置1Eの構成においても、検知部D1及び検知領域D2が設けられているため、例えば検知部D1の検知結果を利用することができる。したがって、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置1Eを提供できる。特に毛切断装置1Eでは、変換部Y4で発生した光を利用するため、比較的簡素な構成で、対象光OB1の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 Even in the configuration of the hair cutting device 1E described above, since the detection unit D1 and the detection area D2 are provided, the detection result of the detection unit D1 can be used, for example. Therefore, it is possible to provide the hair cutting device 1E having improved reliability regarding light output. In particular, since the hair cutting device 1E uses the light generated by the conversion unit Y4, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1 with a relatively simple configuration.
 (4.3)その他の変形例
 上述した毛切断装置1の制御回路6は、現在の光強度だけでなく、累積使用時間等の実績データ(履歴)を用いて、時間経過に伴う光強度の「変化の態様」から、特定状態の種類(異常、汚れ、及び経年劣化)を判定している。しかし、例えば、特定状態について「異常」の判定のみに着目する場合には、制御回路6は、実績データを用いずに、現在の光強度と閾値との比較だけで「異常」の有無を判定してもよい。
(4.3) Other Modifications The control circuit 6 of the hair cutting device 1 described above uses not only the current light intensity but also actual data (history) such as cumulative usage time to determine the light intensity with the passage of time. The type of specific state (abnormality, dirt, and deterioration over time) is determined from the "mode of change". However, for example, when focusing only on the determination of "abnormality" for a specific state, the control circuit 6 determines the presence or absence of "abnormality" only by comparing the current light intensity with the threshold value without using actual data. You may.
 上述した毛切断装置1の検知部D1は、二次光(拡散光)の対象光OB1を受光しているが、例えば、一次光、つまり光導波路4内を進行して導出された光を直接受光してもよい。ただし、二次光を利用する方が、上述の通り、対象光OB1の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。また検知部D1の長寿命化も図れる。 The detection unit D1 of the hair cutting device 1 described above receives the target light OB1 of the secondary light (diffused light), but for example, the primary light, that is, the light traveling in the optical waveguide 4 and being derived directly. It may receive light. However, by using the secondary light, as described above, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light OB1. In addition, the life of the detection unit D1 can be extended.
 制御回路6は、検知部D1からの検知信号に基づき、製造出荷時の光出力に比べて、光導波路4の「経年劣化」によって光出力が低下したことを検知すると、その低下した「ずれ」をオフセットする補正を行ってもよい。つまり、制御回路6は、光導波路4の「経年劣化」の発生を検知すると、光源21の光強度を増加させる補正を行ってもよい。 When the control circuit 6 detects that the optical output is reduced due to the "aging deterioration" of the optical waveguide 4 as compared with the optical output at the time of manufacture and shipment based on the detection signal from the detection unit D1, the reduced "shift" is detected. May be corrected to offset. That is, when the control circuit 6 detects the occurrence of "aging deterioration" of the optical waveguide 4, the control circuit 6 may make a correction to increase the light intensity of the light source 21.
 毛切断装置1は、操作部26を通じて主電源のオン/オフの切り替えを受け付けていることを説明した。しかし、毛切断装置1は、更に光源21の駆動の開始、すなわち光源21からの光出力の開始も、操作部26を通じて受け付け可能に構成されてもよい。この場合、制御回路6における、センサ部S1からの検知信号に基づいて光源21の駆動を自動的に開始したり、自動的に光出力に制限したりする機能は省略されてもよい。 It was explained that the hair cutting device 1 accepts switching of the main power supply on / off through the operation unit 26. However, the hair cutting device 1 may be configured to accept the start of driving the light source 21, that is, the start of the light output from the light source 21, through the operation unit 26. In this case, the function of automatically starting the driving of the light source 21 based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1 in the control circuit 6 or automatically limiting the light output to the optical output may be omitted.
 また毛切断装置1は、センサ部S1からの検知信号に基づいて、主電源のオン/オフの切り替えも自動的に行うように構成されてもよい。この場合、例えばセンサ部S1は、接点を開閉するスイッチを含んでもよい。この場合、毛切断装置1は、皮膚92から受ける押圧によってセンサ部S1が接点を閉じることで、主電源がオンに切り替わり、更に光源21の駆動も自動的に開始する。この場合、ユーザは操作部26を操作する手間が省けて、使い勝手が更に改善される。 Further, the hair cutting device 1 may be configured to automatically switch the main power on / off based on the detection signal from the sensor unit S1. In this case, for example, the sensor unit S1 may include a switch for opening and closing the contacts. In this case, the hair cutting device 1 closes the contact point of the sensor unit S1 by the pressure received from the skin 92, so that the main power supply is switched on and the driving of the light source 21 is automatically started. In this case, the user can save the trouble of operating the operation unit 26, and the usability is further improved.
 センサ部S1は、通電方式のセンサを構成してもよい。例えば、一対のセンサ部S1の電極(第1センサ部S11の電極S2と、第2センサ部S12の電極S2と)が、陽極と陰極とをそれぞれ構成してもよい。制御回路6は、これらの電極間に電圧を印加し、皮膚92がこれらの電極に接触した場合に人体を介して電極間に流れる電流を検知することで、皮膚92の接触状態を判定してもよい。 The sensor unit S1 may be configured as an energization type sensor. For example, the pair of electrodes of the sensor unit S1 (the electrode S2 of the first sensor unit S11 and the electrode S2 of the second sensor unit S12) may form an anode and a cathode, respectively. The control circuit 6 determines the contact state of the skin 92 by applying a voltage between these electrodes and detecting the current flowing between the electrodes through the human body when the skin 92 comes into contact with these electrodes. May be good.
 またセンサ部S1は、皮膚92の接触状態ではなく、皮膚92の近接状態を検知するための近接センサでもよい。この場合、センサ部S1は、皮膚92までの距離を検知する距離センサを構成してもよい。 Further, the sensor unit S1 may be a proximity sensor for detecting the proximity state of the skin 92 instead of the contact state of the skin 92. In this case, the sensor unit S1 may configure a distance sensor that detects the distance to the skin 92.
 またセンサ部S1は、皮膚92からの押圧(圧力)を受けることで抵抗値が変化する感圧センサを構成してもよい。 Further, the sensor unit S1 may be configured as a pressure-sensitive sensor whose resistance value changes by receiving pressure from the skin 92.
 センサ部S1が2つ以上設けられている場合、2つ以上のセンサ部S1は、互いに検知方式が異なるセンサを構成してもよい。 When two or more sensor units S1 are provided, the two or more sensor units S1 may form sensors having different detection methods from each other.
 例えば、光源21等を収容する装置本体2(ケース20)は、グリップに相当することを想定したが、ケース20とは別体にグリップ部が設けられていて、ケース20とグリップ部とが連結されてもよい。そして、ケース20内の収容物は、ケース20とグリップ部とに分散的に収容されてもよい。 For example, the device main body 2 (case 20) accommodating the light source 21 and the like is assumed to correspond to a grip, but a grip portion is provided separately from the case 20, and the case 20 and the grip portion are connected to each other. May be done. Then, the contents in the case 20 may be housed in the case 20 and the grip portion in a distributed manner.
 また、操作部26は、メカニカルスイッチに限らず、タッチスイッチ、光学式若しくは静電容量式の非接触スイッチ、又はジェスチャセンサ等であってもよい。さらに、操作部26は、例えば、スマートフォン等の外部端末からの操作信号を受け付ける通信部、又はユーザの音声操作を受け付ける音声入力部等であってもよい。 Further, the operation unit 26 is not limited to the mechanical switch, but may be a touch switch, an optical or capacitive non-contact switch, a gesture sensor, or the like. Further, the operation unit 26 may be, for example, a communication unit that receives an operation signal from an external terminal such as a smartphone, or a voice input unit that accepts a user's voice operation.
 また、毛切断装置1は、物理的な「刃」にて毛91を切断するシェーバ(刃が駆動される電気シェーバを含む)等と組み合わされてもよい。この場合、毛切断装置1は、光放出部40に加えて、物理的な「刃」を有することで、光放出部40から放出される光と物理的な「刃」との両方で、毛91を切断できる。 Further, the hair cutting device 1 may be combined with a shaver (including an electric shaver in which the blade is driven) that cuts the hair 91 with a physical "blade" or the like. In this case, the hair cutting device 1 has a physical "blade" in addition to the light emitting unit 40, so that the hair is provided by both the light emitted from the light emitting unit 40 and the physical "blade". 91 can be cut.
 また、光導波路4は、コア部41及びクラッド部42が合成石英製である光ファイバに限らず、例えば、石英(SiO)製又はプラスチック製の光ファイバであってもよい。プラスチック製の光ファイバの例としては、クラッド部42がフッ素系ポリマ等からなり、コア部41が完全フッ素化ポリマ、ポリメタクリル酸メチル系又はポリカーボネート等からなる光ファイバがある。さらに、光導波路4は、スラブ導波路、矩形光導波路又はフォトニック結晶ファイバ等であってもよい。 Further, the optical waveguide 4 is not limited to an optical fiber in which the core portion 41 and the clad portion 42 are made of synthetic quartz, and may be, for example, an optical fiber made of quartz (SiO 2 ) or plastic. As an example of an optical fiber made of plastic, there is an optical fiber in which the clad portion 42 is made of a fluorine-based polymer or the like and the core portion 41 is made of a completely fluorinated polymer, polymethyl methacrylate-based or polycarbonate or the like. Further, the optical waveguide 4 may be a slab waveguide, a rectangular optical waveguide, a photonic crystal fiber, or the like.
 また、光導波路4は、最小限の構成としてコア部41を有していればよく、クラッド部42は適宜省略されていてもよい。 Further, the optical waveguide 4 may have a core portion 41 as a minimum configuration, and the clad portion 42 may be omitted as appropriate.
 また、保持部材5における接着部材52の屈折率が光放出部40(コア部41)の屈折率よりも小さいことは、毛切断装置1に必須の構成ではない。つまり、接着部材52の屈折率は、コア部41の屈折率以上であってもよい。 Further, it is not an essential configuration for the hair cutting device 1 that the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 in the holding member 5 is smaller than the refractive index of the light emitting portion 40 (core portion 41). That is, the refractive index of the adhesive member 52 may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41.
 またホルダ部H1内における固定部材F1の屈折率がコア部41の屈折率よりも小さいことは、毛切断部材3、及び毛切断装置1に必須の構成ではない。つまり、固定部材F1の屈折率は、コア部41の屈折率以上であってもよい。同様に、フェルール71内における接着部材G1の屈折率がコア部41の屈折率よりも小さいことは、毛切断部材3、及び毛切断装置1に必須の構成ではない。つまり、接着部材G1の屈折率は、コア部41の屈折率以上であってもよい。 Further, the fact that the refractive index of the fixing member F1 in the holder portion H1 is smaller than the refractive index of the core portion 41 is not an essential configuration for the hair cutting member 3 and the hair cutting device 1. That is, the refractive index of the fixing member F1 may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41. Similarly, the fact that the refractive index of the adhesive member G1 in the ferrule 71 is smaller than the refractive index of the core portion 41 is not an essential configuration for the hair cutting member 3 and the hair cutting device 1. That is, the refractive index of the adhesive member G1 may be equal to or higher than the refractive index of the core portion 41.
 また光源21は、単一波長の光に限らず、例えば、複数の波長の光を発生してもよい。この場合、光源21は、複数の波長の光を、同時に発生してもよいし、順次切り替えながら発生してもよい。この構成では、光放出部40から毛91に放出する光(第1放出光Op1)は、複数の波長に対応する複数の発色団を標的とし得るので、複数種類の分子の結合を破壊することができ、毛91の切断効率の向上を図ることができる。 Further, the light source 21 is not limited to light having a single wavelength, and may generate light having a plurality of wavelengths, for example. In this case, the light source 21 may generate light having a plurality of wavelengths at the same time, or may generate light while sequentially switching. In this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting unit 40 to the hair 91 (first emitted light Op1) can target a plurality of chromophores corresponding to a plurality of wavelengths, so that the bonds of a plurality of types of molecules are broken. It is possible to improve the cutting efficiency of the hair 91.
 また毛切断部材3は、光導波路4を複数備えていてもよい。この場合、毛切断部材3は、複数の光導波路4の各々の光放出部40にて毛91に光を放出して毛91を切断することが可能になる。ここで、複数の光導波路4は、同一の波長の光を通してもよいし、互いに異なる複数の波長の光を通してもよい。この場合、フェルール71内においては、複数の光導波路4が中心寄りに集まって配置されてもよい。あるいは光導波路4と一対一で対応するようにフェルール71が複数設けられてもよい。 Further, the hair cutting member 3 may be provided with a plurality of optical waveguides 4. In this case, the hair cutting member 3 can cut the hair 91 by emitting light to the hair 91 at each light emitting unit 40 of the plurality of optical waveguides 4. Here, the plurality of optical waveguides 4 may pass light having the same wavelength or may pass light having a plurality of wavelengths different from each other. In this case, in the ferrule 71, a plurality of optical waveguides 4 may be arranged so as to be closer to the center. Alternatively, a plurality of ferrules 71 may be provided so as to have a one-to-one correspondence with the optical waveguide 4.
 また光源21の動作モードについて、第1モードと第2モードとの切替えが手動で行われているが、この例に限らず、第1モードと第2モードとの切替えが自動的に行われてもよい。例えば、判定部65が、皮膚92の接触状態に応じて、第1モードと第2モードとの切替えを自動的に行ってもよい。 Further, regarding the operation mode of the light source 21, the switching between the first mode and the second mode is manually performed, but the switching is not limited to this example, and the switching between the first mode and the second mode is automatically performed. May be good. For example, the determination unit 65 may automatically switch between the first mode and the second mode according to the contact state of the skin 92.
 電池23は、二次電池に限らず、一次電池であってもよい。さらに、毛切断装置1は、電池駆動式に限らず、例えば、系統電源(商用電源)等の外部電源からの電力供給を受けて動作してもよい。この場合、毛切断装置1としての電池23は省略可能である。 The battery 23 is not limited to the secondary battery, but may be a primary battery. Further, the hair cutting device 1 is not limited to the battery-powered type, and may operate by receiving power supply from an external power source such as a system power source (commercial power source), for example. In this case, the battery 23 as the hair cutting device 1 can be omitted.
 また、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度は、光源21からの出力以外で調整されていてもよい。例えば、光学系22又は光導波路4に含まれる光学フィルタにて、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が調整されてもよい。あるいは、光導波路4の曲率半径を変えることによって、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が調整されてもよい。光導波路4の一部からコア部41を露出させ、コア部41から光の一部を漏洩させることで、光導波路4を通る光のパワー密度が調整されてもよい。 Further, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 may be adjusted by other than the output from the light source 21. For example, the power density of light passing through the optical waveguide 4 may be adjusted by an optical filter included in the optical system 22 or the optical waveguide 4. Alternatively, the power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 may be adjusted by changing the radius of curvature of the optical waveguide 4. The power density of the light passing through the optical waveguide 4 may be adjusted by exposing the core portion 41 from a part of the optical waveguide 4 and leaking a part of the light from the core portion 41.
 また、光導波路4における受光面40Aと反対側の終端面40Bにミラーが配置され、光導波路4の先端部まで到達する光がミラーにて光導波路4内に反射されるように構成されていてもよい。 Further, a mirror is arranged on the end surface 40B on the opposite side of the light receiving surface 40A in the optical waveguide 4, and the light reaching the tip of the optical waveguide 4 is reflected in the optical waveguide 4 by the mirror. May be good.
 また、皮膚92への作用という機能は、あくまで毛切断装置1の副次的な機能であって、適宜省略可能である。つまり、毛切断装置1は、基本的な機能である毛91の切断の機能を有していればよい。 Further, the function of acting on the skin 92 is only a secondary function of the hair cutting device 1, and can be omitted as appropriate. That is, the hair cutting device 1 may have a function of cutting the hair 91, which is a basic function.
 また、二値間の比較において、「以上」としているところは、二値が等しい場合、及び二値の一方が他方を超えている場合との両方を含む。ただし、これに限らず、ここでいう「以上」は、二値の一方が他方を超えている場合のみを含む「より大きい」と同義であってもよい。つまり、二値が等しい場合を含むか否かは、閾値等の設定次第で任意に変更できるので、「以上」か「より大きい」かに技術上の差異はない。同様に、「未満」においても「以下」と同義であってもよい。 Also, in the comparison between two values, the place where "greater than or equal to" includes both the case where the two values are equal and the case where one of the two values exceeds the other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and "greater than or equal to" here may be synonymous with "greater than" including only the case where one of the two values exceeds the other. That is, whether or not the two values are equal can be arbitrarily changed depending on the setting of the threshold value and the like, so there is no technical difference between "greater than or equal to" and "greater than". Similarly, "less than" may be synonymous with "less than or equal to".
 毛切断装置1は、毛切断部材3のカバー30に取外し可能に取り付けられたアタッチメントを備えてもよい。アタッチメントによって、皮膚92の表面921からの光放出部40の高さを増加させてもよい。 The hair cutting device 1 may be provided with a detachably attached attachment to the cover 30 of the hair cutting member 3. The attachment may increase the height of the light emitting portion 40 from the surface 921 of the skin 92.
 (5)まとめ
 以上説明したように、第1の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)は、光放出モジュール(M1)と、カバー(30)と、検知領域(D2)と、検知部(D1)と、を備える。光放出モジュール(M1)は、コア部(41)を含む光導波路(4)を有し、皮膚(92)から突出する毛(91)に光を放出することで毛(91)の切断を行う。カバー(30)は、光放出モジュール(M1)を覆うように構成される。検知領域(D2)は、カバー(30)内に配置されて、光導波路(4)内を伝達する光に起因した対象光(OB1)が通る。検知部(D1)は、検知領域(D2)内の対象光(OB1)を検知する。第1の態様によれば、毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)が、検知領域(D2)内の対象光(OB1)を検知する検知部(D1)を備えていることで、検知部(D1)の検知結果を利用することができる。したがって、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)を提供できる。
(5) Summary As described above, the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) according to the first aspect includes a light emitting module (M1), a cover (30), a detection area (D2), and detection. A unit (D1) is provided. The light emitting module (M1) has an optical waveguide (4) including a core portion (41), and cuts the hair (91) by emitting light to the hair (91) protruding from the skin (92). .. The cover (30) is configured to cover the light emitting module (M1). The detection region (D2) is arranged in the cover (30), and the target light (OB1) caused by the light transmitted in the optical waveguide (4) passes through. The detection unit (D1) detects the target light (OB1) in the detection area (D2). According to the first aspect, the hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) includes a detection unit (D1) for detecting the target light (OB1) in the detection region (D2), whereby the detection unit (D1) is provided. The detection result of D1) can be used. Therefore, it is possible to provide a hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) having improved reliability regarding light output.
 第2の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)に関して、第1の態様において、検知領域(D2)は、カバー(30)内における、光導波路(4)内を伝達する光の伝達方向(A2)の伝達先となる一端側の空間に配置される。第2の態様によれば、検知領域(D2)が、毛(91)を切断する光の放出に影響を与えてしまう可能性を低減できる。 Regarding the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) according to the second aspect, in the first aspect, the detection region (D2) transmits light transmitted in the optical waveguide (4) in the cover (30). It is arranged in the space on one end side which is the transmission destination of the direction (A2). According to the second aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection region (D2) affects the emission of light that cuts the hair (91).
 第3の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)に関して、第1又は第2の態様において、対象光(OB1)は、光導波路(4)内を伝達して検知領域(D2)に向かう光のうちの一部の光である。第3の態様によれば、例えば、検知領域(D2)に向かう光を直接検知する場合に比べて、対象光(OB1)の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 Regarding the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) according to the third aspect, in the first or second aspect, the target light (OB1) is transmitted in the optical waveguide (4) to the detection region (D2). It is a part of the light that goes. According to the third aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1), as compared with the case where the light directed to the detection region (D2) is directly detected, for example.
 第4の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)に関して、第3の態様において、対象光(OB1)は、全反射せずに光導波路(4)から漏れ出た漏れ光を含む。第4の態様によれば、比較的簡素な構成で、対象光(OB1)の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 Regarding the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) according to the fourth aspect, in the third aspect, the target light (OB1) includes the leaked light leaked from the optical waveguide (4) without total internal reflection. According to the fourth aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
 第5の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)は、第3又は第4の態様において、拡散部(Y1,Y2)を更に備える。拡散部(Y1,Y2)は、検知領域(D2)内に配置され、光導波路(4)内を伝達して検知領域(D2)に進入した光を拡散反射又は拡散透過させる。対象光(OB1)は、拡散部(Y1,Y2)で拡散された拡散光を含む。第5の態様によれば、比較的簡素な構成で、対象光(OB1)の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 The hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the fifth aspect further includes a diffusion unit (Y1, Y2) in the third or fourth aspect. The diffusing portions (Y1 and Y2) are arranged in the detection region (D2), and diffusely reflect or diffusely transmit the light transmitted through the optical waveguide (4) and entering the detection region (D2). The target light (OB1) includes diffused light diffused by the diffusing portions (Y1, Y2). According to the fifth aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
 第6の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)は、第1~第5の態様のいずれか1つにおいて、変換部(Y4)を更に備える。変換部(Y4)は、第1~第4の態様のいずれか1つに備えられることが好ましい。変換部(Y4)は、検知領域(D2)内に配置され、光導波路(4)内を伝達して検知領域(D2)に進入した光(励起光)により励起を引き起こして光を発生する蛍光体粒子(Y40)を含む。対象光(OB1)は、変換部(Y4)で発生した光を含む。第6の態様によれば、比較的簡素な構成で、対象光(OB1)の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 The hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the sixth aspect further includes a conversion unit (Y4) in any one of the first to fifth aspects. The conversion unit (Y4) is preferably provided in any one of the first to fourth aspects. The conversion unit (Y4) is arranged in the detection region (D2), and the fluorescence transmitted through the optical waveguide (4) and enters the detection region (D2) causes excitation to generate light. Includes body particles (Y40). The target light (OB1) includes the light generated by the conversion unit (Y4). According to the sixth aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
 第7の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)は、第1~第6の態様のいずれか1つにおいて、検知領域(D2)内に配置され、光導波路(4)内を伝達して検知領域(D2)に進入した光を反射する反射部(Y3)を更に備える。反射部(Y3)は、第1~第4の態様のいずれか1つに備えられることが好ましい。対象光(OB1)は、反射部(Y3)で反射された反射光を含む。第7の態様によれば、比較的簡素な構成で、対象光(OB1)の輝度飽和によって検知精度が低下してしまう可能性を低減できる。 The hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the seventh aspect is arranged in the detection region (D2) in any one of the first to sixth aspects and transmits in the optical waveguide (4). Further, a reflecting unit (Y3) that reflects the light that has entered the detection region (D2) is further provided. The reflective portion (Y3) is preferably provided in any one of the first to fourth aspects. The target light (OB1) includes the reflected light reflected by the reflecting unit (Y3). According to the seventh aspect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the detection accuracy is lowered due to the luminance saturation of the target light (OB1) with a relatively simple configuration.
 第8の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)は、第1~第7の態様のいずれか1つにおいて、判定部(65)を更に備える。判定部(65)は、検知部(D1)による対象光(OB1)に関する検知結果に基づき、毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)の光出力に関する状態が特定状態にあるか否かを判定する。第8の態様によれば、検知部(D1)の検知結果を利用して特定状態の判定を行えるため、光出力に関する信頼性が更に向上する。 The hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) according to the eighth aspect further includes a determination unit (65) in any one of the first to seventh aspects. The determination unit (65) determines whether or not the state regarding the light output of the hair cutting device (1,1A to 1E) is in a specific state based on the detection result regarding the target light (OB1) by the detection unit (D1). .. According to the eighth aspect, since the determination of the specific state can be performed by using the detection result of the detection unit (D1), the reliability regarding the optical output is further improved.
 第9の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)に関して、第8の態様において、さらに判定部(65)は、対象光(OB1)の光強度に関する変化の態様に基づき、特定状態の種類を特定する。第9の態様によれば、特定状態の種類の特定も行えるため、光出力に関する信頼性が更に向上する。 Regarding the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) according to the ninth aspect, in the eighth aspect, the determination unit (65) is in a specific state based on the aspect of the change in the light intensity of the target light (OB1). Identify the type. According to the ninth aspect, since the type of the specific state can be specified, the reliability regarding the light output is further improved.
 第10の態様に係る毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)は、第9の態様において、判定部において、少なくとも特定状態の種類が所定の種類であることが特定された場合、光放出モジュール(M1)からの光出力を制限する制限部(66)を更に備える。第10の態様によれば、所定の種類に応じた光出力の制限を行えるようになり、光出力に関する信頼性が更に向上する。 The hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) according to the tenth aspect is a light emitting module (in the ninth aspect, when it is specified in the determination unit that at least the type of the specific state is a predetermined type. A limiting unit (66) that limits the light output from M1) is further provided. According to the tenth aspect, the light output can be limited according to a predetermined type, and the reliability of the light output is further improved.
 第11の態様に係る毛切断方法は、光放出ステップと、検知ステップと、を含む。光放出ステップでは、コア部(41)を含む光導波路(4)を有する光放出モジュール(M1)から、皮膚(92)から突出する毛(91)に光を放出させることで、毛(91)の切断を行う。検知ステップでは、光放出モジュール(M1)を覆うように構成されるカバー(30)内に配置されて光導波路(4)内を伝達する光に起因した対象光(OB1)が通る検知領域(D2)内の対象光(OB1)を検知する。第11の態様によれば、毛切断方法が、検知領域(D2)内の対象光(OB1)を検知する検知ステップを含むことで、検知部(D1)の検知結果を利用することができる。したがって、光出力に関する信頼性が向上された毛切断方法を提供できる。 The hair cutting method according to the eleventh aspect includes a light emission step and a detection step. In the light emission step, the hair (91) is emitted from the light emission module (M1) having the optical waveguide (4) including the core portion (41) to the hair (91) protruding from the skin (92). Cut off. In the detection step, the detection region (D2) through which the target light (OB1) caused by the light transmitted through the optical waveguide (4), which is arranged in the cover (30) configured to cover the light emission module (M1), passes through. ) Detects the target light (OB1). According to the eleventh aspect, the hair cutting method includes the detection step of detecting the target light (OB1) in the detection region (D2), so that the detection result of the detection unit (D1) can be used. Therefore, it is possible to provide a hair cutting method with improved reliability regarding light output.
 第2~10の態様に係る構成については、毛切断装置(1,1A~1E)に必須の構成ではなく、適宜省略可能である。 The configurations according to the second to tenth aspects are not essential configurations for the hair cutting apparatus (1,1A to 1E) and can be omitted as appropriate.
 毛切断装置は、家庭用、又は美容、医療若しくは介護等の様々な分野において、人又は人以外の動物の様々な毛の切断に適用することができる。 The hair cutting device can be applied to cutting various hairs of humans or non-human animals in various fields such as home use, beauty, medical care, and long-term care.
 1,1A~1E 毛切断装置
 30 カバー
 4 光導波路
 41 コア部
 65 判定部
 66 制限部
 91 毛
 92 皮膚
 A2 伝達方向
 D1 検知部
 D2 検知領域
 M1 光放出モジュール
 OB1 対象光
 Y1,Y2 拡散部
 Y3 反射部
 Y4 変換部
 Y40 蛍光体粒子
1,1A-1E Hair cutting device 30 Cover 4 Optical wave guide 41 Core part 65 Judgment part 66 Limit part 91 Hair 92 Skin A2 Transmission direction D1 Detection part D2 Detection area M1 Light emission module OB1 Target light Y1, Y2 Diffuse part Y3 Reflection part Y4 converter Y40 phosphor particles

Claims (10)

  1.  コア部を含む光導波路を有し、皮膚から突出する毛に光を放出することで前記毛の切断を行う光放出モジュールと、
     前記光放出モジュールを覆うように構成されるカバーと、
     前記カバー内に配置されて、前記光導波路内を伝達する光に起因した対象光が通る検知領域と、
     前記検知領域内の前記対象光を検知する検知部と、
    を備える、
     毛切断装置。
    A light emitting module that has an optical waveguide including a core portion and emits light to the hair protruding from the skin to cut the hair.
    A cover configured to cover the light emitting module,
    A detection area that is arranged in the cover and through which the target light caused by the light transmitted in the optical waveguide passes.
    A detection unit that detects the target light in the detection area,
    To prepare
    Hair cutting device.
  2.  前記検知領域は、前記カバー内における、前記光導波路内を伝達する光の伝達方向の伝達先となる一端側の空間に配置される、
     請求項1に記載の毛切断装置。
    The detection region is arranged in the space on one end side of the cover, which is the transmission destination of the light transmitted in the optical waveguide.
    The hair cutting device according to claim 1.
  3.  前記対象光は、前記光導波路内を伝達して前記検知領域に向かう光のうちの一部の光である、
     請求項1又は2に記載の毛切断装置。
    The target light is a part of the light transmitted through the optical waveguide and directed to the detection region.
    The hair cutting device according to claim 1 or 2.
  4.  前記対象光は、全反射せずに前記光導波路から漏れ出た漏れ光を含む、
     請求項3に記載の毛切断装置。
    The target light includes leaked light leaked from the optical waveguide without total internal reflection.
    The hair cutting device according to claim 3.
  5.  前記検知領域内に配置され、前記光導波路内を伝達して前記検知領域に進入した光を拡散反射又は拡散透過させる拡散部を更に備え、
     前記対象光は、前記拡散部で拡散された拡散光を含む、
     請求項3又は4に記載の毛切断装置。
    Further provided with a diffuser portion which is arranged in the detection region and diffuses and reflects or diffuses the light transmitted through the optical waveguide and entering the detection region.
    The target light includes diffused light diffused in the diffused portion.
    The hair cutting device according to claim 3 or 4.
  6.  前記検知領域内に配置され、前記光導波路内を伝達して前記検知領域に進入した光により励起を引き起こして光を発生する蛍光体粒子を含む変換部を更に備え、
     前記対象光は、前記変換部で発生した光を含む、
     請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の毛切断装置。
    Further provided with a conversion unit including phosphor particles arranged in the detection region, transmitted through the optical waveguide, and caused excitation by light entering the detection region to generate light.
    The target light includes light generated in the conversion unit.
    The hair cutting device according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  7.  前記検知領域内に配置され、前記光導波路内を伝達して前記検知領域に進入した光を反射する反射部を更に備え、
     前記対象光は、前記反射部で反射された反射光を含む、
     請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の毛切断装置。
    Further provided with a reflecting unit which is arranged in the detection region and transmits light in the optical waveguide and reflects light that has entered the detection region.
    The target light includes the reflected light reflected by the reflecting portion.
    The hair cutting device according to any one of claims 1 to 6.
  8.  前記検知部による前記対象光に関する検知結果に基づき、前記毛切断装置の光出力に関する状態が特定状態にあるか否かを判定する判定部を更に備える、
     請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の毛切断装置。
    A determination unit for determining whether or not the state regarding the light output of the hair cutting device is in a specific state based on the detection result of the target light by the detection unit is further provided.
    The hair cutting device according to any one of claims 1 to 7.
  9.  さらに前記判定部は、前記対象光の光強度に関する変化の態様に基づき、前記特定状態の種類を特定する、
     請求項8に記載の毛切断装置。
    Further, the determination unit specifies the type of the specific state based on the mode of change in the light intensity of the target light.
    The hair cutting device according to claim 8.
  10.  前記判定部において、少なくとも前記特定状態の種類が所定の種類であることが特定された場合、前記光放出モジュールからの光出力を制限する制限部を更に備える、
     請求項9に記載の毛切断装置。
    When the determination unit specifies that at least the type of the specific state is a predetermined type, the determination unit further includes a restriction unit that limits the light output from the light emission module.
    The hair cutting device according to claim 9.
PCT/JP2021/019134 2020-06-18 2021-05-20 Hair cutting device WO2021256152A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020-105677 2020-06-18
JP2020105677A JP7437690B2 (en) 2020-06-18 2020-06-18 hair cutting device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021256152A1 true WO2021256152A1 (en) 2021-12-23

Family

ID=79196673

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/019134 WO2021256152A1 (en) 2020-06-18 2021-05-20 Hair cutting device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP7437690B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2021256152A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005511196A (en) * 2001-12-10 2005-04-28 イノレーズ 2002 リミテッド Method and apparatus for improving safety while exposed to a monochromatic light source
US20080244912A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-10-09 Morgan Lars Ake Gustavsson Optical Shaving Apparatus
JP2015527091A (en) * 2012-06-04 2015-09-17 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ LIOB-based hair cutting device
JP2016514491A (en) * 2013-03-15 2016-05-23 モーガン、 ラース、 エイク グスタフソン、 Laser shaving, apparatus for cutting hair using laser light, and method for shaving hair with laser light

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3036232U (en) 1996-09-26 1997-04-15 ヤーマン株式会社 Optical hair removal device
JP4816571B2 (en) 2007-05-28 2011-11-16 パナソニック電工株式会社 Optical hair removal equipment
JP2009240395A (en) 2008-03-28 2009-10-22 Panasonic Electric Works Co Ltd Light irradiation apparatus for adjusting hair growth
WO2013051219A1 (en) 2011-10-03 2013-04-11 ヤーマン株式会社 Laser depilatory device
TR201807605T4 (en) 2014-07-25 2018-06-21 Koninklijke Philips Nv A device to cut hair.
JP2019512340A (en) 2016-03-29 2019-05-16 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェKoninklijke Philips N.V. Cutting element for use in hair cutting device and method of manufacturing the same

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2005511196A (en) * 2001-12-10 2005-04-28 イノレーズ 2002 リミテッド Method and apparatus for improving safety while exposed to a monochromatic light source
US20080244912A1 (en) * 2007-03-16 2008-10-09 Morgan Lars Ake Gustavsson Optical Shaving Apparatus
JP2015527091A (en) * 2012-06-04 2015-09-17 コーニンクレッカ フィリップス エヌ ヴェ LIOB-based hair cutting device
JP2016514491A (en) * 2013-03-15 2016-05-23 モーガン、 ラース、 エイク グスタフソン、 Laser shaving, apparatus for cutting hair using laser light, and method for shaving hair with laser light

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2021194485A (en) 2021-12-27
JP7437690B2 (en) 2024-02-26

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP6580551B2 (en) Laser shaving, apparatus for cutting hair using laser light, and method for shaving hair with laser light
WO2021256155A1 (en) Hair cutting device
JP2010160948A (en) Light source device
US9696477B2 (en) Light source system
WO2021090560A1 (en) Hair cutting device and hair cutting system
WO2021256152A1 (en) Hair cutting device
US9423103B2 (en) Light source device for tubular observation device
RU2700232C1 (en) Cutting unit for device for hair cutting
WO2021256154A1 (en) Hair cutting device
WO2021256153A1 (en) Hair cutting device
JP7228814B2 (en) Hair cutting device and hair cutting system
JP7178592B2 (en) Hair-cutting member and hair-cutting device
WO2021131341A1 (en) Hair cutting member, device body of hair cutting device, and hair cutting device
CN114901102B (en) Hair cutting member and hair cutting device
JP7220385B2 (en) Hair cutting device and hair cutting system
CN211155673U (en) Multispectral light source
CN212522001U (en) Small-size appearance optical structure that moults
US20190231427A1 (en) Guard structure for a hair cutting device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21827036

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21827036

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1